TEX48194-253F

High performance multifunction quiet inverter
VVVF Inverter
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
200 V systems
SBT-0.75K/1.5K to SBT 22K/30K for general industry, fan and pump
SBT-30K to 55K
400 V systems
SHF-1.5K to SHF-250K for general industry
SPF-2.2K to SPF-315K for fan and pump
SANKEN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Thank you for purchasing the Sanken
general-purpose inverter. This inverter is
designed to drive an induction motor at a variable speed. The inverter has a built-in microcomputer providing a wide range of functions and easy operability. To ensure many years of troublefree operation and maintain optimum performance, be sure to read through this manual before
using the product.
[For Safe Use]
Safety instructions are given in this manual and on the product to prevent physical injury to
yourself or others, or damage to property.
Read the instructions thoroughly and use the product correctly.
After reading, keep this manual to hand for reference.
Critical safety instructions are marked “Danger” or “Caution” as follows:
Danger
This symbol indicates a hazard that could lead to death or serious injury if
the warning is ignored and the product is handled incorrectly.
Caution
This symbol indicates a hazard that could lead to injury or damage to
property if the warning is ignored and the product is handled incorrectly.
* Even ignoring an instruction marked “Caution” can have serious consequences under some
circumstances. Be sure to abide by all instructions, irrespective of the degree of danger.
Meanings of symbols
This symbol indicates a potential danger.
The specific danger is indicated in the symbol. (This example indicates a
general danger.)
This symbol indicates the need for caution.
The specific caution is indicated in the symbol. (This example indicates a
general caution.)
This symbol indicates a prohibition.
The specific prohibited action is indicated in the symbol. (This example indicates a general prohibition.)
This symbol indicates an action that must be performed.
The specific action is indicated in the symbol. (This example indicates a general requirement.)
Safety Notes
1.
Mount the inverter on a strong metal panel or similar surface using the specified
screws.
2.
Ground the inverter and the motor using their ground terminals (
3.
Install a circuit breaker (MCCB) of the appropriate capacity between the inverter and
the power supply.
4.
The inverter incorporates high-voltage circuitry that could cause an electric shock or
other physical injury. Do not touch the inside of the inverter.
5.
When carrying out maintenance or inspection, turn the power off and check with a
circuit tester that there is no voltage between X and P on the terminal board after the
CHARGE lamp goes out.
6.
Some internal components in the inverter retain an electric change even when the
inverter is not operating. Do not touch the terminal board.
7.
When using a power supply with a frequency of 60 Hz or more, check the safety of the
load, including the motor and so on.
8.
Turn the power off when not using the inverter for a long time.
9.
This inverter is made for domestic use. Please consult us before exporting this product.
).
Contents
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Safety Notes .....................................................................................................................................1
Notes on Installation .....................................................................................................................1
Notes on Wiring ...........................................................................................................................1
Notes on Operation ......................................................................................................................2
Notes on Maintenance and Inspection ...........................................................................................2
Disposal .......................................................................................................................................3
Others ..........................................................................................................................................3
2.
Checking the Product and Precautions on Use ...................................................................................4
2.1 Checking the Product ...................................................................................................................4
2.2 Precautions on Use .......................................................................................................................6
3.
Installation .........................................................................................................................................7
3.1 Installation Location ......................................................................................................................7
3.2 Installation Direction and Space ....................................................................................................9
3.3 Removing and Attaching the Front Cover ....................................................................................10
3.3.1 Small-capacity model (200V type SBT-3.7K/5.5K or less, 400V type SHF-4.0K or less,
400V type SPF-5.5K or less) ................................................................................................10
3.3.2 Middle- or large-capacity model (200V type SBT-5.5K/7.5K or more, 400V type
SHF-5.5K or more, 400V type SPF-7.5K or more) .............................................................. 11
3.4 Removing and Attaching the Operation Panel .............................................................................. 11
3.4.1 Small-capacity model (200V type SBT-3.7K/5.5K or less, 400V type SHF-4.0K or less,
400V type SPF-5.5K or less) ................................................................................................ 11
3.4.2 Middle- or large-capacity model (200V type SBT-5.5K/7.5K or more, 400V type
SHF-5.5K or more, 400V type SPF-7.5K or more) .............................................................. 11
4.
Wiring .............................................................................................................................................12
4.1 Wiring Instructions ......................................................................................................................12
4.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams ....................................................................................................16
5.
Operation Panel ..............................................................................................................................28
5.1 Section Names ...........................................................................................................................28
5.2 Operation Panel Keys ................................................................................................................28
5.3 Display Modes ...........................................................................................................................29
6.
Operation........................................................................................................................................31
6.1 Preliminary Checks .....................................................................................................................31
6.2 Test Run .....................................................................................................................................31
6.3 Operation ...................................................................................................................................32
6.3.1 Operation through the operation panel (Status Display mode)..................................................32
6.3.2 Operation with external signals ...............................................................................................33
6.3.3 Jog operation .........................................................................................................................34
6.3.4 Hold operation.......................................................................................................................35
6.3.5 Notes on free run stop terminal (MBS) ...................................................................................35
6.4 Reading Alarm Data ...................................................................................................................36
6.5 Operational Error Displays .........................................................................................................37
6.6 Conflict Error Displays ...............................................................................................................38
6.7
6.8
Other Displays ...........................................................................................................................40
Definition of Technical Terms ......................................................................................................41
7.
Setting Functions .............................................................................................................................42
7.1 Changing Settings (Function Code Display Mode) .......................................................................42
7.2 Function Code List .....................................................................................................................48
7.3 Description of Functions .............................................................................................................60
7.4 Serial Communication Function ...................................................................................................99
7.4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................99
7.4.2 Terminal functions and wiring ..................................................................................................99
7.4.3 Inverter operation and function code setting by serial communication .....................................100
7.4.4 Serial communication functions .............................................................................................103
7.4.5 Programming .......................................................................................................................106
8.
Protection Functions ......................................................................................................................123
8.1 Warning Status .........................................................................................................................123
8.2 Alarm Status ............................................................................................................................124
8.3 Protection Operations ...............................................................................................................127
9.
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................129
10. Maintenance and Inspection...........................................................................................................130
10.1 Precautions on Checking and Maintenance ................................................................................130
10.2 Basic Inspection Items ..............................................................................................................130
10.3 Megger Test .............................................................................................................................132
10.4 Part Replacement .....................................................................................................................132
10.5 Electrical Measurement of Main Circuit .....................................................................................134
11. Specifications ................................................................................................................................135
11.1 Standard Specifications ...........................................................................................................135
11.2 Communication Specifications ..................................................................................................143
12.
External Dimensions ......................................................................................................................144
13.
Options .........................................................................................................................................149
1.
Safety Notes
1.1 Notes on Installation
Caution
Do not store or use the inverter under the environmental conditions described below.

Failure to observe this warning may result in a fault, damage, or deterioration, which
could lead to fire.
• Very hot, cold, or humid locations
• In direct sunlight
• Near a heater or other heat source
• In a location subject to vibration or physical shock
• Near equipment that generates sparks
• In a location subject to dust, corrosive or inflammable gases, salt, water droplets, or oil mist
• Outdoors
• Higher than 1000 meters above sea level
• Other similar environments
Mount the inverter on a metal surface or other non-flammable surface.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
Do not hold the inverter by the front cover when carrying it.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury if the inverter is dropped.
Install the inverter in a location that can bear its weight.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury if the inverter falls down.
Do not place flammable materials near the inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
Do not allow foreign objects into the inverter or attach to the cooling fans.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire or an accident.
Do not operate an inverter which is damaged, lacking parts or dented.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock, injury, fire or accident.
1.2 Notes on Wiring
Danger
Wiring must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or fire due to incorrect wiring.
Turn off the power before carrying out wiring.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or fire.
Connect the ground cable.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or fire.
Install the main part of the inverter before wiring.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or injury.
Caution
Do not connect AC power to an output terminal (U, V, or W).
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury or fire.
Check that the AC power supply voltage is equal to the rated voltage of the inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury or fire.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals (P and X).
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
The inverter, motor or wiring may cause noise. This may result in errors in peripheral
devices.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an accident.
-1-
1.3 Notes on Operation
Danger
Attach the front cover before turning the power on.
Do not remove the front cover when the power is on.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
Do not touch any switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
Do not touch any inverter terminal when the inverter is energized even if the motor is
not operating.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
Do not get close to the machinery driven by the inverter after an alarm stop because it
will restart suddenly if the retry function is selected.
(Design the system to ensure physical safety at restart.)
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Provide a separate emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Turn off the operation signal before resetting an alarm, otherwise the operation signal
will restart the machinery driven by the inverter suddenly.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Caution
Do not touch the radiator fins or DC reactor because they become very hot.
Failure to observe this warning may result in burns.
It is easy to set the inverter drive speed from low to high, so be sure to confirm the
operating range of the motor and machinery driven by the inverter before making such
settings.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Provide a retaining brake if necessary.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Do not start or stop the inverter by turning the main circuit ON or OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in problems with the inverter.
1.4 Notes on Maintenance and Inspection
Danger
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be carried out by a qualified
engineer.
[Take off any metal items (watch, bracelet, etc.) before working on the equipment.]
[Use insulated tools.]
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or injury.
Turn off the power for maintenance or inspection. After the CHARGE lamp goes out,
check that the voltage between DC terminals P and X is less than 30 VDC.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
-2-
1.5 Disposal
Caution
Dispose of this product as industrial wastes.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an injury.
1.6 Others
Danger
Do not modify this product.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock, injury, failure, damage or fire.
This product operates a three-phase induction motor. Do not use for single-phase
motor or other purposes.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire or accident.
Do not use this product for life-support equipment, or other purposes directly related to
dangers to people.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an accident.
Install a safety device when this product is applied to facilities where the failure of this
product may cause a serious accident or damage.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an accident.
-3-
2.
Checking the Product and Precautions on Use
2.1 Checking the Product
After unpacking the product, check the following:
(1) Check the model, capacity and other ratings on the inverter casing.
INVERTER
INVERTER
TYPE: SBT-0.75K/1.5K
(A)
SOURCE
3PH 200-230V 50/60Hz
P
H
CHARACTERISTIC
OUTPUT
5.1A
7.0A
MOTOR
Max.0.75kW Max.1.5kW
OVERLOAD
150% 1min 120% 1min
SERIAL No.
* * * * * * * * * *
SANKEN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Model
Power supply voltage/frequency
Characteristics (*1)
Rated output current
Applicable motor
Overload capacity
TYPE: SPF-90K
(A)
SOURCE
3PH 380-460V 50/60Hz
173A
OUTPUT
Max.90kW
MOTOR
120% 1min
OVERLOAD
SERIAL No.
* * * * * * * * * *
MASS
70kg
SANKEN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
MADE IN JAPAN
Model
Power supply voltage/frequency
Rated output current
Applicable motor
Overload capacity
Mass *4
MADE IN JAPAN
(200 V systems)
(400 V systems)
Figure 2.1 Inverter ratings
Table 2.1 Applicable motor/inverter models (200 V systems)
Applicable
motor
Model
P characteristic (*1)
0.75kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
H characteristic (*1)
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
SBT-2.2K/3.7K
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
SBT-7.5K/11K
SBT-11K/15K
SBT-15K/18.5K
SBT-18.5K/22K
SBT-22K/30K
30kW
SBT-30K
SBT-22K/30K
37kW
SBT-37K
45kW
SBT-45K
55kW
SBT-55K
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
SBT-2.2K/3.7K
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
SBT-7.5K/11K
SBT-11K/15K
SBT-15K/18.5K
SBT-18.5K/22K
*1 H characteristic: Constant torque load (for general industry)
P characteristic: Square-reduced torque load (for fan and pump)
-4-
Table 2.2 Applicable motor/inverter models (400 V systems)
Applicable
motor
Model
1.5kW
2.2kW
4kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
SHF *2
SHF-1.5K
SHF-2.2K
SHF-4.0K
SHF-5.5K
SHF-7.5K
SHF-11K
SHF-15K
SHF-18.5K
SHF-22K
SPF *3
SPF-2.2K
SPF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K
SPF-11K
SPF-15K
SPF-18.5K
SPF-22K
30kW
SHF-30K
SPF-30K
37kW
SHF-37K
SPF-37K
45kW
SHF-45K
SPF-45K
55kW
SHF-55K
SPF-55K
75kW
SHF-75K
SPF-75K
90kW
SHF-90K
SPF-90K
110kW
SHF-110K
SPF-110K
132kW
SHF-132K
SPF-132K
160kW
SHF-160K
SPF-160K
200kW
SHF-200K
SPF-200K
220kW
SHF-220K
SPF-220K
250kW
SHF-250K
SPF-250K
280kW
SPF-280K
315kW
SPF-315K
*2 SHF: Constant torque load (for general industry)
*3 SPF: Square-reduced torque load (for fan and pump)
*4 The mass value is provided for models SHF-75K or higher and SPF90K or higher.
(2) If the casing was dented or damaged during transportation or any other problem is found, contact the
retailer.
-5-
2.2 Precautions on Use
1.
Install the product in a location satisfying the standard environmental specifications (temperature,
humidity, vibration, and dust).
2.
Before starting up the product for the first time, carefully check the wiring.
Make sure that the power cable (input) and motor cable (output) are connected correctly. Otherwise,
the inverter will be damaged.
3.
Since the ambient temperature of the installation location greatly affects the life of the inverter, it is
recommended to keep the ambient temperature low.
4.
When installing the product in an enclosure, check the enclosure size and ensure sufficient ventilation.
5.
The capacitor and surge killer attached to the output side of the inverter for power-factor improvement
may overheat or be damaged by output harmonic components of the inverter. Do not connect a capacitor or a surge killer to the inverter since surging it will set off overcurrent protection.
Install the DC or AC reactor to the primary side of the inverter for power-factor improvement.
6.
When implementing a megger test, follow the instructions given in 10.3, “Megger Test.”
7.
Use a high frequency earth leakage breaker when necessary.
8.
Avoid inserting a magnetic contactor between the inverter and the motor.
If the magnetic contactor is turned on and off while the inverter is operating, an excess current flows.
9.
Select larger capacity since the operating characteristics of full electromagnetic-type MCCB changes
with high harmonic current.
-6-
3.
Installation
Read the safety notes before installation.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in injury or fire.
3.1 Installation Location
(1) Do not install the inverter in direct sunlight or in a hot or humid location. Select a clean, dry location that
is free of corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust.
(2) Install the inverter in a location that is free from vibration.
Use the inverter under the environmental conditions described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Operating environment
-10 to +50°C
(Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
SBT
-10 to +40°C
P characteristic
(Remove the top ventilation cover of SBT-3.7K/5.5K or
lower model at temperatures of +30°C or higher)
Ambient
temperature
-10 to +50°C
SHF
(Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
-10 to +40°C
SPF
(Remove the top ventilation cover of SPF-5.5K or lower model at temperatures of +30°C or higher)
H characteristic
Ambient
humidity
Operating
environment
Location
90%PH or less
(with no condensation)
At 1000 m or lower altitude
(No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist or dust)
Indoor
Store the inverter under the environmental conditions described in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Storage environment
Storage
environment
-20 to +65°C
This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
Ambient temperature must be +30°C or lower for more than 3 months of storage in consideration of the deterioration
of the electrolytic capacitor.
The product must be energized once a year for periods of 1 year or more.
Ambient
humidity
Storage
environment
90%PH or less
(with no condensation)
No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, dust, steam, water droplet, vibration, or high salinity.
-7-
Table 3.3 Mounting screw
Series
SBT series
SHF series
SPF series
Capacity
SBT-0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K
SBT-5.5K/7.5K to 15K/18.5K
SBT-18.5K/22K to 22K/30K
SBT-30K to 55K
SHF-1.5K to SHF-4.0K
SHF-5.5K to SHF-18.5K
SHF-22K
SHF-30K to SHF-55K
SHF-90K to SHF-110K
SHF-132K to SHF-160K
SHF-200K
SHF-220K to SHF-250K
SPF-2.2K to SPF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K to SPF-22K
SPF-30K
SPF-37K to SPF-75K
SPF-90K to SPF-132K
SPF-160K to SPF-220K
SPF-250K
SPF-280K to SPF-315K
-8-
Mounting screw
M4
M5
M6
M6
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M16
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M16
3.2 Installation Direction and Space
(1) This inverter is of the wall mounting type.
(2) Install the inverter vertically on a flat mounting surface.
(3) Since the inverter generates heat, provide adequate space for air circulation to cool the unit.
(4) When installing the inverter in an enclosure, provide a ventilation fan to keep the ambient temperature
below 40°C.
(5) When installing the inverter in an enclosure, mounting the inverter so that the radiator fins are outside the
enclosure will help to reduce the internal temperature of the enclosure.
(6) The inverter has an IP-20 housing, and may need to be mounted in an enclosure in certain environments.
If the ambient temperature is likely to become 40°C or more with the H characteristic
(constant torque load) or 30°C or more with the P characteristic (square-reduced torque
load), remove the top ventilation cover of the unit.
10cm
min.
5cm
min.
Inside
Outside
5cm
min.
10cm
min.
Fixture (optional)
Cooling fan
Cooling air
SBT
SHF-55K and lower
SPF-75K and lower
Figure 3.2 Installing the inverter with the radiator fins
outside the enclosure
50cm
min.
15cm
min.
50cm
min.
SHF-75K to SHF-250K
SPF-90K to SPF-315K
Figure 3.1 Space around the inverter
-9-
When two or more inverters are housed in an enclosure, be sure to locate the ventilation
fans properly to allow free air circulation. If the ventilation fans are mounted improperly, the
ambient temperature will rise and reduce the cooling of the inverter.
Ventilation fan
Inside the enclosure
(Good)
Inside the enclosure
Cooling air
Inside the enclosure
(Bad)
(Good)
Figure 3.3 Housing in enclosure
Cooling air
Ventilation fan
Inside the enclosure
(Bad)
Figure 3.4 Ventilation fan position in enclosure
3.3 Removing and Attaching the Front Cover
3.3.1
Small-capacity model (200V type SBT-3.7K/5.5K or less, 400V type SHF-4.0K or
less, 400V type SPF-5.5K or less)
(1) Removing the front cover
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the cover (Figure 3.5). Pull the cover toward you while pressing the
sides of the casing (Figure 3.6).
Figure 3.5
Figure 3.6
(2) Attaching the front cover
Hook the slots at the top of the front cover over the tabs on the casing and fit the cover onto the casing.
Then tighten the screws at the bottom of the cover.
- 10 -
3.3.2
Middle- or large-capacity model (200V type SBT-5.5K/7.5K or more, 400V type
SHF-5.5K or more, 400V type SPF-7.5K or more)
(1) Removing the front cover
Remove the screws (two to four) at the bottom of the cover. Lift the cover upward a little and remove
the cover.
(2) Attaching the front cover
Hook the tabs on the front cover over the slots on the casing and close the cover. Then tighten the two
screws at the bottom of the cover.
3.4 Removing and Attaching the Operation Panel
3.4.1
Small-capacity model (200V type SBT-3.7K/5.5K or less, 400V type SHF-4.0K or
less, 400V type SPF-5.5K or less)
(1) Removing the operation panel
Remove the cover according to the instructions in part (1) of section 3.3.1 and disconnect the operation
panel connection cable (Figure 3.7).
Loosen the upper right and lower left screws (Figure 3.8) and pull the operation panel toward you to
remove it.
Figure 3.7
Figure 3.8
(2) Attaching the operation panel
Hold the operation panel in place, and tighten the upper right and lower left screws. Remove the cover
of the inverter according to the instructions in part (1) of section 3.3.1 and connect the operation panel
connection cable securely.
Then attach the cover according to the instructions in part (2) of section 3.3.1.
3.4.2
Middle- or large-capacity model (200V type SBT-5.5K/7.5K or more, 400V type
SHF-5.5K or more, 400V type SPF-7.5K or more)
(1) Removing the operation panel
Remove the cover according to the instructions in part (1) of section 3.3.1 and disconnect the operation
panel connection cable.
Loosen the upper right and lower left screws (Fig. 3.8) and remove the panel.
(2) Attaching the operation panel
Remove the cover of the inverter according to the instructions in part (1) of section 3.3.2. Hold the
operation panel in place, and tighten the upper right and lower left screws. Then connect the operation
panel connection cable securely.
Finally, attach the cover according to the instructions in part (2) of section 3.3.2.
- 11 -
4.
Wiring
Read the safety notes before installation.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in injury or fire.
4.1 Wiring Instructions
Wiring must be performed by qualified personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or fire due to incorrect wiring.
Turn off the inverter power supply and check with a circuit tester that no voltage is present. Check also that
the CHARGE lamp is not lit.
(1) Be sure to connect a circuit breaker (MCCB) between the power supply and the power input terminals
(R, S, T). (Use a high-frequency earth leakage breaker when necessary.)
Connect a magnetic contactor (MC) between the MCCB and the power input terminals (R, S, T).
R
S
T
Output
terminals
Power supply
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
MC
Power input
terminals
MCCB
U
V
IM
W
Control circuit
P P1 PR X terminals
Figure 4.1 Basic wiring diagram of the inverter
Connect the ground cable.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or fire.
(2) The phase order does not need to be considered when wiring the power input terminals (R, S, and T).
(3) Connect the motor to the output terminals (U, V, W) correctly.
The harmonic component leakage current increases by stray capacitance of wiring and causes adverse
affects on the inverter itself and peripheral equipment when the length of wiring between inverter and motor
is too long.
Wire the inverter and the motor within the length described in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Length of wiring between the inverter and the motor
Length of wiring between the inverter and the motor
Carrier frequency (Specified by Cd051)
50 m
Cd051=130 or less
100 m
Cd051=090 or less
200 m
Cd051=040 or less
z Total length of wiring between the inverter and the motors must be within the length described in
Table 4.1 when driving multiple motors.
- 12 -
z The surge voltage generated by the inverter element switching is superimposed and terminal voltage
of the motor is impressed. The following measures should be considered to prevent deterioration of
motor isolation especially for 400 V class motors when the length of wiring between the inverter and
the motor is long.
1) Use reinforced motor isolation.
2) Length of wiring between the inverter and the motor should be as short as possible. (10 to 20 m
or less)
(4) See Table 4.3 for details of the MCCB and MC capacitors and wire sizes.
Use sleeved crimp terminals for the power and motor cables.
(5) Use shielded or twisted-pair wires for wiring to the control circuit terminals. Keep the wires well away
from the main and high-voltage circuits (including 200 V relay sequence circuit).
(6) Use a micro-signal or twin contact relay for the control circuit terminal to prevent poor contact.
(7) Ground the ground terminal (
) securely.
Use the ground terminal of the inverter when grounding. (Do not use the case or the chassis.)
According to the electrical installation technical standards, connect to the grounding electrode applies either
type D grounding for 200 V systems or type C grounding for 400 V systems.
Table 4.2 Types of grounding
Voltage
Types of grounding Ground resistance
200 V systems Type D grounding
100 Ω or less
400 V systems Type C grounding
10 Ω or less
z Do not share the grounding wire with the welding machine or the power machinery.
z Use the grounding wire prescribed in the electrical installation technical standards, and wire this is as
short as possible.
z Be careful not to loop the grounding wire when using multiple inverters.
INV
INV
INV
(a) Good
INV
INV
INV
(b) Good
Figure 4.2 Grounding
- 13 -
INV
INV
(b) Bad
INV
Table 4.3 MCCB and MC capacitors and wire sizes
200V systems
Model
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
SBT-2.25K/3.7K
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
SBT-7.5K/11K
SBT-11K/15K
SBT-15K/18.5K
SBT-18.5K/22K
SBT-22K/30K
Load
Circuit Magnetic contactor (MC)
Motor breaker
Rated
Rated applied
capacity (MCCB) current [A] current [A]
[A]
Main circuit
Recommended wire size [mm2]
Input wire
P/P1 wire
Output wire
H characteristic 0.75kW
10
11
20
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
P characteristic
1.5kW
10
11
20
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
H characteristic
1.5kW
15
11
20
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
P characteristic
2.2kW
15
11
20
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
H characteristic
2.2kW
20
11
20
2.0 (1.25)
2.0 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
1.25 (1.25)
P characteristic
3.7kW
20
11
20
2.0 (1.25)
2.0 (1.25)
H characteristic
3.7kW
30
18
25
3.5 (1.25)
3.5 (1.25)
2.0 (1.25)
P characteristic
5.5kW
30
18
25
3.5 (1.25)
3.5 (2.0)
2.0 (1.25)
H characteristic
5.5kW
40
18
32
5.5 (2.0)
3.5 (2.0)
3.5 (2.0)
P characteristic
7.5kW
50
26
50
5.5 (3.5)
5.5 (3.5)
3.5 (2.0)
H characteristic
7.5kW
60
26
50
8 (3.5)
8 (3.5)
5.5 (2.0)
P characteristic
11kW
75
50
80
14 (8)
14 (5.5)
8 (3.5)
H characteristic
11kW
75
50
80
14 (8)
14 (5.5)
8 (3.5)
P characteristic
15kW
100
65
100
22 (14)
14 (8)
14 (5.5)
H characteristic
15kW
100
65
100
22 (14)
22 (8)
14 (5.5)
P characteristic
18.5kW
125
65
100
14 × 2 (14)
22 (14)
14 (8)
H characteristic 18.5kW
125
80
135
38 (14)
22 (14)
22 (8)
P characteristic
22kW
150
80
135
38 (22)
38 (14)
22 (14)
H characteristic
22kW
150
80
135
38 (22)
38 (14)
22 (14)
P characteristic
30kW
175
152
200
22 × 2 (38)
22 × 2 (22)
38 (14)
SBT-30K
H characteristic
30kW
200
152
200
60 (38)
60 (22)
38 (22)
SBT-37K
H characteristic
37kW
250
180
260
100 (60)
60 (38)
60 (22)
SBT-45K
H characteristic
45kW
300
220
260
150 (60)
100 (60)
100 (38)
SBT-55K
H characteristic
55kW
350
300
350
150 (100)
150 (60)
100 (60)
- 14 -
Control circuit
Screw Maximum Screw Maximum
wire size
wire size
diameter [mm2] diameter
[mm2]
M4
5.5
M6
22
M8
38
M10
100
M10
150
M3
1.25
400V systems (1)
Main circuit
Rated
Recommended wire size [mm2]
Screw
applied
current [A] Input wire P/P1 wire Output wire d iameter
Model
SHF-1.5K
10
7
20
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
15
7
20
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
20
7
20
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
30
7
17
20
32
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
2.0(2.0)
30
50
17
32
3.5(2.0)
3.5(2.0)
3.5(2.0)
50
25
50
5.5
8.0
3.5
5.5
3.5(2.0)
60
32
60
14
5.5(3.5)
5.5(3.5)
75
100
48
80
14(5.5)
8.0(5.5)
5.5(3.5)
100
48
65
80
100
22(14)
14(14)
8.0(5.5)
SPF-30K
125
75
135
SHF-30K
SPF-37K
SHF-37K
SPF-45K
SHF-45K
SPF-55K
SHF-55K
SPF-75K
150
150
175
200
200
225
225
225
75
75
93
150
150
150
150
150
135
135
150
200
200
200
200
200
SPF-2.2K
SHF-2.2K
SPF-4.0K
SHF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
SHF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K
SHF-7.5K
SPF-11K
SHF-11K
SPF-15K
SHF-15K
SPF-18.5K
SHF-18.5K
SPF-22K
SHF-22K
Control circuit
Magnetic contactor(MC)
Circuit
breaker
(MCCB)
[A]
Rated
current
[A]
14×2
22(14)
22(14)
22(8)
38(14)
22×2(22) 22(14)
22×2(22) 22(14)
22×2(38) 38(14)
38(14)
60(38)
38×2(38) 60(22)
38×2(38) 60(22)
60(38) 38×2(38)
Maximum
wire size
[mm 2 ]
M4
Screw
d iameter
Maximum
wire size
[mm 2 ]
M3
1.25
5.5
M6
22
14(8)
14(5.5)
22(8)
22(8)
22(14)
22(14)
38(14)
38(14)
60(38)
38
M8
60
Note 1: The values for wires in the main circuit are for 600 V IV PVC-insulated wires (60ºC) when the inverter
ambient temperature is 40ºC. The values in parentheses are for 600 V bridged-polyethylene insulated
wires (90ºC).
Note 2: The maximum wire size indicates the maximum size of wire that can be used with the terminal board.
400V systems (2)
Model
SHF-75K
SPF-90K
SHF-90K
SPF-110K
SHF-110K
SPF-132K
SHF-132K
SPF-160K
SHF-160K
SPF-200K
SHF-200K
SPF-220K
SHF-220K
SPF-250K
SHF-250K
SPF-280K
SPF-315K
Circuit Magnetic contactor(MC)
Main circuit
Control circuit
Control power
breaker
Recommended
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Rated
Rated
Screw
Screw
Screw
(MCCB) current
wire size [mm2]
wire size
wire size
wire size
applied
diameter
diameter
diameter
[A]
[mm2]
[mm2]
[mm2]
current [A] Input wire P/P1 wire Output wire
[A]
175
90
150
60 (22) 100 (38) 60 (22)
100
200
150
200
60 (38) 100 (60) 60 (38)
M10
250
180
260
100 (60) 150 (60) 100 (60)
150
300
180
260
150 (60) 150 (100) 150 (60)
350
265
350
150 (100) 200 (100) 150 (100)
450
400
420
200 (150) 325 (150) 200 (100)
500
600
660
250 (150) 325 (200) 250 (150)
600
600
660
325 (150) 150×2 (200) 325 (150)
600
700
600
600
660
660
150×2 (200) 250×2 (250) 150×2 (200)
200×2 (200) 250×2 (325) 200×2 (200)
- 15 -
325
M16
–
325
–
M3
1.25
M4
5.5
4.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams
(1) Main circuit connections
200V systems
MC
DC
reactor
Brake
resistor
Option
MCCB
Motor
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.1 SBT-0.75K/1.5K - 3.7K/5.5K
MC
DC
reactor
Option
MCCB
Brake
resistor
Motor
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.2 SBT-5.5K/7.5K - 7.5K/11K
MC
DC
reactor
Option
MCCB
Motor
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.3 SBT-11K/15K
DC
reactor
Option
MC
MCCB
Motor
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.4 SBT-15K/18.5K
MC
DC
reactor
Option
MCCB
Motor
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.5 SBT-18.5K/22K - 22/30K
SBT-30K, 37K
- 16 -
MC
MCCB
Motor
DC
reactor
Option
3 φ 200 - 230V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.6 SBT-45K, 55K
400V systems
MC
DC
reactor
Break resistor
MCCB
Motor
Option
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.7 SHF-1.5K-4.0K SPF-2.2K-5.5K
MC
DC
reactor
Break resistor
MCCB
Motor
Option
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.8 SHF-5.5K-15K SPF-7.5K-18.5K
MC
DC
reactor
Option
MCCB
Motor
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.9 SHF-18.5K-22K SPF-22K-30K
*1
TAP1 COM TAP2
MC
DC
reactor
Option
MCCB
*2
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.10 SHF-30K-55K SPF-37K-75K
- 17 -
Motor
*1
TAP1 COM TAP2
MC
DC
reactor
*2
Standard
MCCB
R1
T1
*4
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
Figure 4.3.11 SHF-75K-200K SPF-90K-220K
*1
TAP1 COM TAP2
DC
reactor
Standard
MC
*2
MCCB
R1
3φ 380 - 460V
50/60Hz
T1
*4
Figure 4.3.12 SHF-220K-250K SPF-250K-315K
*1 For SHF-37K and higher, and SPF-45K and higher, a tap (TAP1 or TAP2) must be switched according to
variable input ranges. Refer to the tap switching table.
Tap switching table
Variable input range
380VAC -15%, +10%
380VAC -460VAC ±10%
Tap position
TAP1 *2
TAP2 *3
*2 Factory preset
*3 Conditions for switching to TAP2
Use TAP2 when the power supply voltage always exceeds 420V or the maximum voltage exceeds 430V.
*4 The above shows a connection by which power is supplied to control power supply even when power
reception is stopped during MC trip.
- 18 -
Table 4.4 Main circuit terminals
Symbol
Terminal
Explanation
R, S, T
Power input terminals
Connected to a three-phase commercial power supply
U, V, W
Inverter output terminals
Connected to a three-phase induction motor
P, P1
DC reactor connection terminals
Connected to a DC reactor *1
P, PR
Brake resistor connection terminals
Connected to a brake resistor *2
(SBT-0.75K/1.5K - SBT-7.5K/11K, SHF-1.5K to
SHF-15K, SPF-2.2K to SPF-18.5K)
DC link voltage connection terminals P: DC positive terminal, X: DC negative terminal
*When connecting a brake unit, connect it to these terminals.
P, X
R1, T1
Control power supply terminals
Connected to control power supply *3
(Power can be independently supplied to the control power
supply.)
*1 Remove the short-circuit bar between P1 and P before connecting to a DC reactor.
*2 The inverter incorporates an internal brake resistor. (SBT)
Remove the connecting line of the internal brake resistor and insulate it with vinyl tape or other insulating
material before using an external brake resistor.
*3 These terminals can be used for SHF-75K or SPF-90K or higher models.
Table 4.5 Example of external brake resistor
Model
*
External brake resistor
SBT
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
SHF
—
SPF
—
Brake resistance
120 Ω or more
Capacity
150W *
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
—
—
60 Ω or more
300W *
SBT-2.2K/3.7K
—
—
60 Ω or more
300W *
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
—
—
40 Ω or more
400W *
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
—
—
20 Ω or more
800W *
SBT-7.5K/11K
—
—
20 Ω or more
800W *
—
SHF-1.5K
SPF-2.2K
320 Ω or more
200W *
—
SHF-2.2K
SPF-4.0K
160 Ω or more
400W *
—
SHF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
120 Ω or more
600W *
—
SHF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K
80 Ω or more
800W *
—
SHF-7.5K
SPF-11K
60 Ω or more
1000W *
—
SHF-11K
SPF-15K
40 Ω or more
1500W *
—
SHF-15K
SPF-18.5K
40 Ω or more
1500W *
In this example, the maximum duty cycle of the brake resistor is assumed to be 10%.
Set Cd049 (Duty Cycle of Brake Resistor) to less than 10% to protect the brake resistor.
When setting the value 10 % or more, brake resistor capacity should be increased in proportion to the
value described in Table 4.5.
Example) When setting 20 %, the capacity should be doubled.
- 19 -
* Table 4.6 shows the list of brake circuit installed in each model.
Table 4.6 Brake circuit installation list
200 V systems
SBT
Model
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
SBT-2.2K/3.7K
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
SBT-7.5K/11K
SBT-11K/15K
SBT-15K/18.5K
SBT-18.5K/22K
SBT-22K/30K
SBT-30K to 55K
Brake resistor
400 V systems
SHF
SHF-1.5K
SHF-2.2K
SHF-4.0K
SHF-5.5K
SHF-7.5K
SHF-11K
SHF-15K
SHF-18.5K to SHF-250K
400 V systems
SPF
SPF-2.2K
SPF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K
SPF-11K
SPF-15K
SPF-18.5K
SPF-22K to SPF-315K
Drive device
: Installed
: Not installed
- 20 -
(2) Control circuit terminal connections
FC
FB
FA
Alarm signal
output (relay
contact output)
RXR TRB TRA
D03
RS485 communication
terminal
(See the explanation of
the communication
function for details.)
D02
D01
Multifunctional
output terminal
(open collector
output)
DCM2 DI8
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI3
DI4
DI2
Multifunctional input terminal
(no-voltage contact input)
DI1 DCM1 +24V
User load
(150 mA max.)
JP1
AOUT2 AOUT1 IRF/VRF2 VRF1 +V1
+V2 ACM
FLASH
V
V
Frequency
command
(0 - 5 V, 0 10 V)
Upgrade terminal
(not connected)
Do not connect
anything to these
terminals except
when upgrading.
Analog output
(0 - 10 VDC)
Frequency
command
(0 - 5 V, 0 - 10 V,
4 - 20 mA)
Figure 4.4 Control circuit connections
1) Frequency setting using variable resistor
z Use a 5 kΩ variable resistor with a rating of 0.3 Ω or more. (Function code Cd002 = 3 or 5)
z Use shielded wires. Connect the terminal end of the shielding to each common terminal and
leave the other end open.
z The control circuit has analog input channels VRF1 and IRF/VRF2. A variable resistor can be
connected to each of the two channels. When connecting a variable resistor using the internal
power terminals of the inverter, connect the resistor to the following power terminals:
VRF1: Connect the variable resistor to the +V1 terminal.
IRF/VRF2: Connect the variable resistor to the +V2 terminal.
Note: When using two variable resistors, do not connect them to the same terminal.
- 21 -
2) Multifunctional output (open collector output)
z The figure below shows an example of using multifunctional output terminals D01 to D03.
* When using a relay, be sure to attach a surge killer (reverse-parallel connected diode).
*
DO1 - DO3
RY
MAX
DC24V
DCM1 - DCM2
Figure 4.5 Example of using multifunctional output (open collector output)
Note: The maximum output current of the multifunctional output is 50 mA.
3) Signal mode switching for emergency stop (multifunctional input ES terminal)
z The figure below shows an example of signal switching when the multifunctional input terminal is
set for the emergency stop (ES) command.
z Select a signal using the function code (Cd070:ES input terminal function).
Normally open signal
ES
→ Cd070 = 1
DCM1 - DCM2
Normally closed signal
ES
→ Cd070 = 2
DCM1 - DCM2
Figure 4.6 ES-terminal signal mode switching
(3) Operation panel cable connection
z When attaching the operation panel outside the unit, disconnect the standard cable and use a commercial shielded 8-pin straight modular cable of less than five meters length with RJ45-type connectors at both ends.
- 22 -
(4) Example of terminal connections (using control terminals)
• When using the control terminals of the inverter, follow the wiring diagram shown below. Use
shielded wires as analog input wires and twisted-pair wires as wires to the frequency meter. (The
settings of the function terminals are factory preset default values.)
• Operation can be performed using the main circuit wiring alone when operation is controlled from the
operation panel. (There is no need to input external signals or frequency commands.)
• Provide MC circuit breakers (MCCBs) between the power supply and the input terminals of the
inverter for protection.
• Provide magnetic contactors (MCs) between the MCCBs and the input terminals of the inverter as
shown below to disconnect the power supply from the inverter and to prevent a fault from propagating when the protection function of the inverter operates or when a fault occurs. Locate the MCs as
close to the inverter as possible.
Inverter samco-vm05
DC reactor
Optional
P1
T1
PR
P
MC
X
Motor
Brake resistor
Note 8
R
Single-phase
220 V
U
S
V
T
W
IM
Note 1
FA
Note 1
OFF
FB
ON
MC
FC
MC
Note 7
In operation 1
Surge killer
Forward run command FR
Multi-speed command 1 2DF
Multi-speed command 2 3DF
Free-run command MBS
External emergency
stop command
ES
Alarm reset command RST
2nd or 4th acceleration/deceleration
command or up terminal AD2
Multifunctional
output terminal
(Factory preset)
DI1
DI2
Note 2
DO2
DI4
DI5
24V, 50mA or less
DCM1 or DCM2
Note 6
+24V
External power supply output
150mA or less
Note 5
AOUT1
DI7
AOUT2
DI8
Frequency setting terminal
TRA
TRB
DC0-10V
Analog output
DC0-10V
V
V
RS485 communications
terminal
RS232C communications
terminal
Note 4
Note 4
(4-20mA or 0-5 V, 0-10V or variable resistor)
Analog signal common terminal
Analog output
RXR
(0-5V, 0-10V, or variable resistor)
IRF/VRF2 Frequency setting terminal
ACM
Overload alarm
level setting signal
Digital signal common terminal
Multifunctional
input terminal
(Factory preset)
DI6
VRF1
Frequency
matching
DO3
DI3
DCM1 or DCM2 Note 6
Digital signal common terminals
+V1
Frequency setting
power supply
(10V)
+V2
Use a 5kΩ resistor
with a rating of
0.3W or more.
Grounding
Alarm signal output terminal
contact capacity
250VAC, 0.3A
DO1
Reverse run command RR
Grounding
User load
R1
MCCB
Note 9
Open collector output
Three-phase power supply
Note 10
D-Sub 9-pin connector
cross cable connection
FLASH
JP1
Upgrade terminal
Note 3
Note 1: Ground the inverter and the motor.
Main circuit terminal
Note 2: The output terminals are multifunctional terminals that users assign individually with
Control circuit input terminal
function codes Cd638 to Cd640.
Note 3: Terminal for upgrading. It should usually be kept open.
Control circuit output terminal
Note 4: Switch the function with function code Cd002. The terminal can be used as an input
Communications circuit terminal
terminal for various feedback signals.
Note 5: The input terminals are multifunctional terminals that users assign individually with function codes Cd630 to Cd637.
Note 6: DCM1 and DCM2 are digital signal common terminals.
Note 7: The alarm signal output terminals are multifunctional terminals that users assign with function code Cd674.
Note 8: SBT-0.75K/1.75K to 7.5K/11K are equipped with a brake resistor as standard. Open the standard resistor when mounting an external brake resistor.
Note 9: SPF-75K is standard equipment.
Note 10: Control power supply terminals (SHF-75K or higher, SPF-90K or higher)
Figure 4.7 Example of terminal connections
- 23 -
Table 4.7 Control circuit terminals
Symbol
DCM1
DCM2
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
ACM
+V1
+V2
Description
z Common terminals for digital I/O signals and for +24 V power supply
Multifunctional input terminals
(Function selection with Cd630
to Cd637)
z Signal input “on” by shorting with one of DCM1 to DCM2
z Signal input “off” by disconnection from one of DCM1 to DCM2
6.6kΩ
DCM1 or DCM2
Analog signal common terminal
z Common terminal for analog signals
Variable resistor connection terminal
for frequency setting VRF1
Variable resistor connection terminal
for frequency setting VRF2
Analog voltage input terminal
z Use a 5 kΩ variable resistor with a rating of 0.3 W or more. (Function
code Cd002 = 3 or 5)
z Power cannot be supplied from this terminal. Connect only a variable
resistor.
z Input 0 to 10 VDC. When frequency setting is controlled by external
input, the command frequency is proportional to the input signal voltage
and the set gain frequency (Cd055) is applied when the input signal is 10 V.
(When the setting of function code Cd002 specifies external control of
VRF1.)
Analog current/voltage input terminal
(for current and voltage input)
+24V
+24 V power output
AOUT1 Internal analog output terminal
AOUT2 (2-channel output)
Output terminals
0V
z The input impedance is about 31 kΩ.
IRF/
VRF2
DO1
DO2
DO3
Multifunctional output terminal
(Function selection with Cd638 to
Cd640)
FA
FB
FC
Alarm signal output terminal and
multifunctional contact output
FA
FB
FC
Communication terminals
+24V
DI1 to DI8
Input terminals
VFR1
Terminal
Digital signal common terminals
TRA
TRB
RXR
JP1
RS485 serial communication
terminals
(See the explanation of the serial
communication function.)
Upgrade jumper
z The input voltage range can be changed from 0 to 5 V using the corresponding function code.
z Current or voltage input (IRF or VRF2) can be selected using the corresponding function code
z When frequency setting is selected, current input IRF or voltage input VRF
can be selected using Cd002.
z The code for selecting IRF or VRF2 depends on the function.
z When VRF2 is selected, the hardware configuration is the same as VRF1.
z When IRF is selected, input 4 to 20 mA DC. When frequency setting is
controlled by external input, the command frequency is proportional to the
input signal voltage and the set gain frequency (Cd063) is applied when the
input signal is 20 mA. When IRF is selected, the input impedance is about
500 Ω.
z +24 VDC power (maximum allowable output current: 150 mA)
z Use the analog signal common terminal (ACM) as ground.
z One monitor item is selected from Cd126 (AOUT1) and Cd128 (AOUT2),
and indicated by an analog output.
z The output signal voltage is from 0 to 10 VDC and the maximum allowable
current is 15 mA. (Set the output coefficient because the output voltage
decreases as the output current increases.)
z The signal output can be varied from 0 to 20 times using function codes
Cd127 (AOUT1) and Cd129 (AOUT2).
z The open collector output is 24 VDC and 50 mA.
+24V
z The signals turn on depending on the function
4.7
DO1 to DO3
selected.
z Use DCM1 or DCM2 digital signal common
0.01uF
DCM1 or DCM2
terminals as ground.
Ω
z These terminals output contact signals indicating that the protective
function has stopped the inverter.
z Cd674: Multifunctional contact outputs according to the relay contact
output setting.
Normal: FA-FC open, FB-FC closed
Abnormal: FA-FC closed, FB-FC open
Contact capacity: 250 VAC, 0.3 A
z Send/receive terminals
z Terminal resistor shorting terminal
z Do not connect anything to these terminals except when upgrading.
- 24 -
(5) Multifunctional input terminals
z The multifunctional input terminals allow the functions of the eight digital input channels to be specified freely by setting a value for the corresponding function code. A multiplexed terminal may have
several functions.
When Cd630 = 11, for example, jog operation can be enabled simply by turning the DI1 terminal on.
Signal inputs are turned on when the control terminals DI1 to DI8 are shorted to the terminals DCM1
to DCM2 and off when they are disconnected. (DCM1 to DCM2 are digital common terminals
connected in the inverter.)
Table 4.8 Multifunctional input codes
Function code No.
Cd630
Cd631
Cd632
Cd633
Cd634
Cd635
Cd636
Cd637
Input terminal name
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
Data range
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
- 25 -
Initial value (symbol)
1 (FR)
2 (RR)
3 (2DF)
4 (3DF)
5 (MBS)
6 (ES)
7 (RST)
8 (AD2)
Table 4.9 Multifunctional input signals
Data No.
0
—
Symbol
Function
Data No.
36
IF
Unused
Symbol
1
FR
Forward run command
37
5DF
2
RR
Reverse run command
38
HD
3
2DF
Multi-speed command 1
39
2P
4
3DF
Multi-speed command 2
40
2PT
5
MBS
Free-run command
41
TCL
6
ES
42
Multiplexed terminal
7
RST
43
CP
8
AD2
External emergency stop command
command or down terminal
Alarm reset command
command or up terminal
2nd or 4th acceleration/deceleration
44
CCL
9
10
11
AD3
JOG
Multiplexed terminal
3rd or 4th acceleration/deceleration
Jog operation command
FR+JOG
45
46
47
PC
PID
PM1
12
Multiplexed terminal
RR+JOG
48
PM2
13
Multiplexed terminal
FR+AD2
49
PM3
14
Multiplexed terminal
RR+AD2
50
PM4
15
Multiplexed terminal
FR+AD3
51
PM5
16
Multiplexed terminal
RR+AD3
52
PM6
17
Multiplexed terminal
FR+2DF
53
PM7
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
RR+2DF
FR+3DF
RR+3DF
FR+2DF+3DF
RR+2DF+3DF
FR+AD2+2DF
RR+AD2+2DF
FR+AD2+3DF
RR+AD2+3DF
FR+AD2+2DF+3DF
RR+AD2+2DF+3DF
FR+AD3+2DF
RR+AD3+2DF
FR+AD3+3DF
RR+AD3+3DF
54
55
56
57
58 to 61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
33
Multiplexed terminal
FR+AD3+2DF+3DF
72
34
35
Multiplexed terminal
PTR
RR+AD3+2DF+3DF
Reset command for simple
scheduled operation timer
74 to99
Reserved
P0
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Reserved
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Reserved
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
Multiplexed terminal
A × 10
A × 100
2 MAX
3 MAX
Function
IRF terminal signal priority
command (*1)
Multi-speed (5th-8th
speed) selection command
Operation signal hold
command
2nd pressure switching
command (option)
2nd pump switching time
selection command (option)
Regular pump timer reset
command (option)
2P+2PT
Command pulse
blockingsignal (optional)
Deviation counter clearing
signal (optional)
P control signal (optional)
PID control switching signal
External motor M1
selecting signal (option)
External motor M2
selecting signal (option)
External motor M3
selecting signal (option)
External motor M4
selecting signal (option)
External motor M5
selecting signal (option)
External motor M6
selecting signal (option)
External motor M7
selecting signal (option)
Zero-speed command (optional)
FR+CCL (optional)
RR+CCL (optional)
FR+MBS
FR+MBS
2DF+AD2
2DF+AD3
3DF+AD2
3DF+AD3
Electric gear × 10 (optional)
Electric gear × 100 (optional)
Selection of 2nd upper
limit frequency (*4)
Selection of 3rd upper
limit frequency (*5)
Reserved
*1 When the IF terminal is on, an analog frequency command signal of 4 to 20 mA input to the IRF input terminal is used as the 1st
speed frequency setting value, regardless of the setting of Cd002. In a sensor-based closed loop pump flow control system or
similar system, it is easy to switch between manual setting from the operation panel in system adjustment mode, and automatic
operation using 4 to 20 mA external analog command signal in ordinary mode.
*2 If this input terminal is on while the inverter is stopped in the PID control mode when Cd071 = 3, the feedback control is invalid
and normal V/f control is effective.
*3 When this input terminal is on while the inverter is stopped, the V/f control mode is set regardless of the setting of Cd071. If
Cd071 is set while the V/f control is being switched, 1 is written to Cd071.
*4 When this terminal is on, the frequency is limited to the value specified by Cd138: 2nd upper limit frequency.
*5 When this terminal is on, the frequency is limited to the value specified by Cd139: 3rd upper limit frequency.
However, if 2MAX and 3MAX is on at the same time, the frequency is limited to what is specified by Cd007.
- 26 -
(6) Multifunctional output terminals
z The multifunctional output terminals allow the functions of the three open-collector output channels to
be specified freely by setting a value for the corresponding function code.
Table 4.10 Multifunctional output codes
Function code No. Output terminal name
Cd638
DO1
Cd639
DO2
Cd640
DO3
Data range
0 to 99
0 to 99
0 to 99
Initial value (symbol)
1 (In operation 1)
5 (Frequency matching)
8 (Overload alarm level setting)
Table 4.11 Multifunctional output signals
Data No.
Function
Remarks
0
—
Unused terminal
1
In operation 1
On when the gate is on
2
Voltage low
3
Operation cycle end signal
Simple scheduled operation
4
In operation 2
Off during DC braking and excitation
5
Frequency matching
1st speed frequency only
6
Frequency matching
1st to 8th speed frequencies
7
Frequency approach
8
Overload alarm level setting signal
Value of Cd048 (Output only in constant operation.)
9
Electrothermal level signal
Output at 80% or more
10
Radiator heat prediction signal
11
Auxiliary pump driving signal
Option
12
Regular pump switching signal
Option
13
Excitation and DC braking signal
14
Lower frequency limit matching signal
15
Upper frequency limit matching signal
16
Servo on signal
Optional
17
Zero servo completion signale
Optional
18
FR signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
19
RR signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
20
2DF signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
21
3DF signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
22
AD2 signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
23
AD3 signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
24
JOG signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
25
MBS signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
26
ES signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
27
RST signal
Multifunctional input terminal status output
28
Switching standby signal
Optional
29
Positioning completion signal
Optional
30
Brake resistor on signal
31
Reserved
32
Frequency counter output
Output frequency
33
Frequency counter output
Command frequency
34
Overload alarm level setting signal
Value of Cd048 (Output when in operation.)
35 to 99
Reserved
- 27 -
5.
Operation Panel
5.1 Section Names
Displays frequency, output current, speed of rotation,
load factor, output voltage, pressure value, no units,
settings, and alarms
7-segment display
Display mode indicators
Control indicator
Ctrl
MPa
V
% rpm
A
Hz
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
Numeric keys
Operation mode indicator
Drive key
DRIVE
STOP
PROG
Decimal point key
Stop key
CLEAR
DISP
.
0
ENTER
Enter key
Step keys
Program key
Display change/clear key
5.2 Operation Panel Keys
Classification
Key symbol
Description of function
Drive key
• Starts forward or reverse run.
(The direction of rotation is switched by Cd130.)
Stop key
• Stops operation.
• Resets the alarm in the alarm stop status.
Display
change/
clear key
Step keys
CLEAR
DISP
• In Status Display mode, changes the display on the 7-segment
display.
• In Function Code Display mode, clears the input numeric data or
makes the preceding
key operation invalid.
• In Status Display mode, increments the frequency.
• In Status Display mode, decrements the frequency.
Program key
Enter key
Numeric keys
Decimal point
key
• Toggles the mode between Status Display and Function Code
Display.
• Confirms numeric data indicated on the 7-segment display.
• In Status Display mode, allows direct frequency setting.
• Used to enter numeric data into the 7-segment display.
- 28 -
5.3 Display Modes
z The operation panel has two modes: Status Display mode and Function Code Display mode. These two
modes can be toggled by pressing the
key.
Table 5.1 7-segment display modes
Display mode
Status Display
Function Code Display
z Press the
CLEAR
DISP
Display contents
Status of the inverter when operating and when stopped (frequency,
output current, speed of rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure value, and no units)
Code number and data
key in Status Display mode to select frequency, output current, speed of rotation, load
factor, output voltage, pressure value, and no units sequentially.
Table 5.2 7-segment display contents in Status Display mode
Unit
Frequency
Output current
Speed of rotation
Hz
A
rpm
Load factor
Output voltage
Pressure value
(optional)
No units
%
V
MPa
—
7-segment display
Stopped
In operation
Set frequency flashes
Output frequency lights
0 flashes
Output current lights
Synchronous speed of the set frequency
Synchronous speed of the output
flashes
frequency lights
0 flashes
Load factor lights
0 flashes
Output voltage lights
PID feedback pressure value flashes
PID feedback pressure value lights
Cd059-selected value flashes
Cd059-selected value lights
Note: The PID feedback pressure value is valid only when the water supply option is used in pressure mode.
z The operation mode indicator indicates whether the inverter is in operation or stopped.
Table 5.3 Operation mode displays
Operation status
Stopped
In operation (forward run or reverse run)
DC braking
Standby
Deceleration to stop
- 29 -
Display
...... Lit
...... Unlit
...... Flashing
z The control indicator is not lit during external operation and flashes during data setting.
Table 5.4 Operation mode displays
Operation command
Display
Not under external operation
...... Lit
...... Unlit
...... Flashing
Under external operation
Operation panel status
Display
Setting data (Function Code Display mode)
or frequency directly
z The 7-segment display displays the version of the inverter software for several seconds after power-on.
(Example of version display)
Software version: Ver. 1.00
Version
Inverter software (*1)
If communication cannot be established between the inverter and the operation panel for some reason at
power-on, the 7-segment display displays the software version of the operation panel for several seconds.
In this case, “ ” is displayed at *1.
- 30 -
6.
Operation
z Read the safety notes before installation.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in injury or fire.
6.1 Preliminary Checks
z Once the inverter has been installed and wired, check the following before power-on:
(1) No miswiring, in particular, no power supply (input) connection to the U, V, or W terminal
(2) No short circuits due to loose pieces of cut wire
(3) No loose screws or terminals
(4) No short circuit or ground fault on the output side or in the sequence circuit
6.2 Test Run
z When Cd001 (operation command selection) is set to 1 (operation through the operation panel), press the
or
key to run or stop the inverter.
(The stop operation will work in any operation mode but the run operation will only work in Status
Display mode.)
* Test run at 5 Hz (Flashing characters are shown as white on a black background.)
Operation
Power-on
Display
Description
All numerals on the 7-segment display remain flashing in the stop
status.
Numeric keys
Enter a numeric value. (Press the ENTER key to confirm an entry
or
using the numeric keys.)
The 7-segment display stops flashing.
Check the direction of rotation.
The 7-segment display changes to flashes to indicate the stop status.
- 31 -
6.3 Operation
At shipping, the inverter functions are set as shown in the function code list. To change the settings
refer to Section 7.1, “Changing Settings”.
6.3.1 Operation through the operation panel (Status Display mode)
(1) Direct frequency setting
z The frequency can be set directly by specifying a numeric value from the operation panel. This is
useful when changing the frequency significantly.
z The frequency can be set during run and stop operations when the frequency or speed of rotation is
displayed in Status Display mode.
* Changing the frequency from 5 to 50 Hz by direct setting
Operation
Display
or
Description
Status Display mode (frequency display).
Numeric key
Displays the rightmost input value.
Numeric key
The display shifts to the left each time a key is pressed.
or
Stores the value as the new frequency and returns the display to the
Status Display mode. If the inverter is in operation, the output
frequency starts changing toward the new set value.
z To correct the numeric value, press the
CLEAR
DISP
key to return to the previous display.
z To stop the direct frequency setting (after using the numeric keys), press the
return to the Status Display mode.
- 32 -
CLEAR
DISP
key rather than
to
(2) Step setting
z Press the
or
key to increment or decrement the displayed frequency to a target frequency.
This is useful for fine adjustment of the set frequency.
z This works during run and stop operations when the frequency or speed of rotation is displayed in
Status Display mode.
*Changing the frequency from 5 to 50 Hz by step setting
Operation
or
Display
Description
or
Status Display mode (frequency/speed of rotation or no units display).
Ð
Pressing the
key or
key displays the current set frequency.
While the
key or
key is held down the value is incremented or
decremented.
When the
key or
key is released, the displayed value is stored
as the new frequency and the output frequency starts to change
toward the new set value if the inverter is in operation.
6.3.2 Operation with external signals
(1) To run and stop the inverter using external signals, set function code Cd001 = 2.
(2) To set the frequency using an external variable resistor or with a current of 4 to 20 mA or a voltage of 0
to 10 V, set function code Cd002 to a value from 2 to 12.
(3) To use external signals, refer to the control circuit terminal connection diagram in Figure 4.4.
Note 1: The inverter does not operate when both the forward run (FR) and reverse run (RR) signals are
input. Simultaneous input of the FR and RR signals during the operation of the inverter activates
the “output frequency lock” function to lock the output frequency both during acceleration and
deceleration.
Note 2: If the operation signal is turned off and a signal to drive the motor in the opposite direction from
the present direction of rotation is input before the inverter stops, the inverter operates according to the value of Cd071 (motor control mode selection).
•
Cd071 = 1 (V/f Control mode)
The inverter operates according to the function code settings when starting and stopping.
Consequently, the change in output frequency around 0 Hz may not follow a straight line,
depending on settings such as the starting frequency. Since DC braking does not work
when reversing the direction of rotation, set the DC braking start frequency low.
•
Cd071 = 2 (Sensorless Vector Control mode)
Braking excitation or starting excitation is not applied when switching the direction of rotation. This allows “forward and reverse run” in a continuous operation.
- 33 -
Forward run
Forward run
Reverse run
Reverse run
Starting
frequency
Frequency
Starting
frequency
Frequency
Time
<V/f Control mode>
Time
<Sensorless Vector Control mode>
6.3.3 Jog operation
(1) Shorting the multifunctional terminal JOG to DCM 1 or 2 changes the inverter to Jog Operation mode.
(2) To use the jog operation, set Cd001 to 2 and short multifunctional terminal JOG to DCM 1 or 2. Then
short multifunctional terminal FR or RR to DCM 1 or 2.
(The jog operation can only be controlled by external signals.)
Forward
Output
frequency
Reverse
Short-circuit
between JOG
and DCM 1/2
Short-circuit
between FR
and DCM 1/2
Short-circuit
between RR
and DCM 1/2
Operation
by external
signals
Jog operation
Normal
operation
(3) The frequency can be set with Cd028 and the acceleration/deceleration time with Cd027.
(4) Inputting a JOG signal when the inverter is in operation does not change the mode to Jog mode. Be sure
to input the JOG signal before or at the same time as starting operation. Even if the short circuit between JOG and DCM 1/2 is removed during jog operation, jog operation continues. (Turn the operation
signal off to stop the inverter.)
(5) In Jog Operation mode, not Cd009 = 2 (flying start) but Cd009 = 1 (starting frequency) becomes valid.
Other functions follow the function code settings.
- 34 -
6.3.4 Hold operation
(1) To use a push-button switch or other momentary contact to control operation, wire the circuit as shown
in Figure 6.1 and set the appropriate function codes (codes related to the multifunctional input terminals
and Cd001 = 2).
DCM1
HD
RR
FR
Reverse
run
Stop
Forward
run
Figure 6.1 Operation signal hold circuit
(2) When the external signal terminals are used to operate and stop the inverter, and you do not want the
motor to automatically restart after recovery from a power failure, use the above circuit and set CD046
to 0.
(3) When operating with the hold function, the inverter does not restart after recovery from the following
conditions:
1) Recovery from free run stop with MBS multifunctional input terminal
2) Recovery from alarm stop with the auto alarm recovery function
3) Recovery from a momentary power failure by the restart function
6.3.5 Notes on free run stop terminal (MBS)
The free run stop terminal is provided for systems in which mechanical braking is used to stop the motor.
When setting the motor to the free run status using the terminal, be sure to turn any operation signal off. If
the free run stop signal is released with an operation signal on, the inverter restarts according to the operating
procedure and the function code settings. Therefore, depending on the free run speed of the motor, an
unexpected overcurrent or overvoltage may occur and result in an alarm stop.
(If flying start is not set as the starting method and the free run stop signal is released when the motor is still
rotating, for example, the inverter will restart from the starting frequency or after DC braking depending on
the starting method.)
- 35 -
6.4 Reading Alarm Data
z The inverter drive keeps a record of up to five previous alarms. This data can be read using function code
Cd098.
Operation
Display
or
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric keys
Specify Cd098
Input wait status
Specify read (Enter 9 to clear the records.)
×××××
×××××
or
Display the most recent alarm
key to read older alarm data
Key to read newer alarm data
No record
Function Code Display mode
CLEAR
DISP
or
Status Display mode
- 36 -
6.5 Operational Error Displays
Table 6.1 Operational error displays
Display
Description
Frequency cannot be set from the operation panel.
The specified function code number is not defined.
The input value is beyond the input range. Motor constants are not registered for Cd053
(motor type).
No operations are permitted from the operation panel.
Function code data cannot be changed because the inverter is in operation.
Function code data cannot be changed because the operation panel is locked.
The input setting conflicts with the installed option board.
The input setting conflicts with the installed option board.
The constants of the connected motor cannot be tuned automatically.
Function code data cannot be changed because the voltage is low (
).
The user’s initialization data is not registered. Register the user’s initialization data using
Cd099 = 99.
Data cannot be transferred because the software version does not match. (Copy function)
Or, data cannot be copied because the data transfer is from the remote operation panel
(optional) to the inverter.
The memory contents cannot be transferred from the operation panel to the inverter. (Copy
function)
Present function code data cannot be transferred to the operation panel. (Copy function)
Data cannot be copied because the transfer is from the inverter to the remote operation panel
(optional).
A password is necessary. Please contact the retailer.
The inverter cannot communicate with the operation panel. Turn off the power and check
the cable connections of the operation panel and the optional board. If an error code is
displayed again, contact the retailer.
The inverter cannot communicate with the operation panel. Turn off the power and check
the cable connections of the operation panel and the optional board. If an error code is
displayed again, contact the retailer.
- 37 -
6.6 Conflict Error Displays
z Input data conflicts with the data of function code number XXX. Correct the input data or change the
data of function code number XXX.
z Table 6.2 lists conflicting function codes and the corresponding error displays.
Table 6.2 Conflict error displays
Setting function code
Code No.
Name
Conflicting function codes
Set value
Cd001
Operation command
selection
≠2
Cd002
1st speed frequency
setting
Cd007
Upper frequency limit
Check rule
Error
display
This value can be set when Cd071 ≠ 4.
Er071
2,3,4
5,6
The following values can be set:
(Cd120 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1 and
(Cd085 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1 and
(Cd086 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1
Er120
Er085
Er086
7,8,9
10, 11
12
The following values can be set:
(Cd120 set value) = 0 and
(Cd085 set value) = 0 and
(Cd086 set value) = 0
Er120
Er085
Er086
This value shall not be lower than the Cd008 lower frequency limit.
Er008
Any
The vector control setting conditions are as follows:
Setting range when Cd053 is two pole: Cd007 ≤ 60 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is four pole: Cd007 ≤ 130 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is six pole: Cd007 ≤ 200 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is eight pole: Cd007 ≤ 270 Hz
Er071
Note: In V/f constant mode of P-characteristic/SPF/SHF-75K
or higher, the maximum output frequency for the upper
frequency limit set by Cd007 is limited to 200 Hz in practice.
Cd008
Lower frequency limit
Any
This value shall not be higher than the Cd007 lower frequency limit.
Er007
Cd037
1st jump bottom
frequency
Any
This value shall not be higher than the 1st jump top frequency of Cd038.
Er038
Cd038
1st jump top frequency
Any
This value shall not be lower than the 1st jump bottom frequency of Cd037. Er037
Cd039
2nd jump bottom
frequency
Any
This value shall not be higher than the 2nd jump top frequency of Cd040.
Er040
Cd040
2nd jump top frequency
Any
This value shall not be lower than the 2nd jump bottom frequency of Cd039. Er039
Cd041
3rd jump bottom
frequency
Any
This value shall not be higher than the 3rd jump top frequency of Cd042.
Cd042
3rd jump top frequency
Any
This value shall not be lower than the 3rd jump bottom frequency of Cd041. Er041
Cd071
Motor control mode
not 3
Er042
This value can be set when Cd160 = 0.
Er160
The vector control setting conditions for other than Cd071 = 12 are as
follows:
Setting range when Cd053 is two pole: Cd007 ≤ 60 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is four pole: Cd007 ≤ 130 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is six pole: Cd007 ≤ 200 Hz
Setting range when Cd053 is eight pole: Cd007 ≤ 270 Hz
Note: The operating range in each vector mode is 120 Hz or less.
Er007
This value cannot be set when a motor not permitted by Cd053 is selected.
Er053
4
This value can be set when Cd001 = 2.
Er001
6
This value can be set when Cd101 = 0 or 3.
Er101
This value can be set when Cd101 ≠ 2.
Er101
11
This value can be set when Cd101 = 0 or 3.
Er101
12
This value can be set when Cd101 ≠ 2.
Er101
7,8,9,10
- 38 -
Setting function code
Code No.
Cd085
Cd086
Name
Conflicting function codes
Set value
Torque limiter analog
(power running)
not 0
Torque limiter analog
(regeneration)
not 0
Cd101
Operation mode selection
Cd120
Analog input switching
1
2
0
not 0
Check rule
Error
display
The following values can be set:
(Cd085 set value) ≠ (Cd120 set value) and
(Cd085 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1 and
Cd002 ≠ 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Er120
Er002
Er002
The following values can be set:
(Cd086 set value) ≠ (Cd120 set value) and
(Cd086 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1 and
Cd002 ≠ 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Er120
Er002
Er002
This value can be set when Cd071 ≠ 6, 11.
This value can be set when Cd071 < 6.
Er071
Er071
This value can be set when Cd175 ≠ 0.
The following values can be set:
(Cd120 set value) ≠ (Cd002 set value) -1 and
“Cd002 ≠ ( 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 and”
(Cd120 set value) ≠ (Cd085 set value) and
(Cd120 set value) ≠ (Cd086 set value)
Er175
Er002
Er002
Er085
Er086
Cd160
Feed pump control
not 0
This value can be set when Cd071 = 3.
Er071
Cd175
Pressure command
not 0
This value can be set when 120 ≠ 0.
Er120
Cd178
Upper pressure value limit
Any
Cd179: This value shall not be lower than the lower pressure value limit.
Er179
Cd179
Lower pressure value limit
Any
Cd178: This value shall not be higher than the higher pressure value limit.
Er178
Note: The two outputs of VRF1 and IRF/VRF2 are checked to see if they conflict. The same input type (e.g.
Cd002 = 0 to 5 V, Cd120 = 0 to 5 V) cannot be set simultaneously for two functions.
Depending on the combination of function settings, however, a single input may be used for two functions
(e.g. Cd002 = 0 to 5 V, Cd120 = 0 to 5 V). Allocate functions to the input terminals so that the two
channels (VRF1 and IRF/VRF2) do not duplicate (conflict with) each other.
- 39 -
6.7 Other Displays
Table 6.3 Other displays
Display
Description
Flashes during the initialization of data
Displayed for a function code requiring confirmation
Flashes during the initialization of user’s data
Flashes when user’s initialization data is confirmed
Flashes during data transfer when copying
Flashes when searching for a function code in user’s data that is different from default data
Displayed during zero-speed operation with vector option (position control mode)
- 40 -
6.8 Definition of Technical Terms
Output
frequency
Operation signal
DC braking signal
Main switching device
Drive signal
Multifunctional output terminal
Operation 1
Multifunctional output terminal
Operation 2
DC braking
DC braking
Standby
Stopped
Terminology
Operation
Operation signal
In operation (Operating)
In constant operation
Stopped
Standby
DC braking
Frequency setting value
or set frequency
Output frequency or
frequency output value
Command frequency
In operation
Stopped
Definition
General term describing both “forward run” and “reverse run” implying that the inverter is
in operation
Signal requesting inverter operation, which is input by pressing the
key on the operation panel or using signals input through multifunctional control input terminals FR and RR
Condition where the operation signal is being input or a drive signal is being output to the
main switching device. In the stop status, the operation signal is off but the main switching
device operates until DC braking, etc. is completed.
Condition when the inverter is in operation at the frequency setting value.
Condition where the operation signal is not being input and the drive signal is not being
output to the main switching device. Even when the operation signal input is on, the input
to the multifunctional control input terminal MBS disables the drive signal output to the
main switching device.
Condition where the operation signal is being input but there is no output for some reason,
for example, while waiting for the start delay time to expire or when the set frequency is
lower than the operation start frequency
DC braking is applied when starting and stopping.
Frequency set with Cd028 to Cd036
(Frequency value corresponding to an external signal when Cd002 = 2 to 16)
Actual inverter output frequency
• V/f mode
When the load is stable, the output frequency normally coincides with the frequency
setting value.
• Sensorless Vector mode
Even when the load is stable, the output frequency does not coincide with the frequency
setting value but keeps changing.
Frequency value used by the inverter. This frequency value is used as a command that
determines the actual output frequency after controls, such as the acceleration/deceleration
function and the current limiting function are applied to any change of the frequency setting
value. The command frequency normally coincides with the set frequency at the end of
acceleration/deceleration.
• V/f mode
If there is no feedback operation such as PID control mode, the command frequency
equals the output frequency.
• Sensorless Vector mode
The command frequency and the output frequency may not match in this mode because
the synchronous speed specified by the number of motor poles and the command
frequency is used as the speed command.
- 41 -
7.
Setting Functions
7.1 Changing Settings (Function Code Display Mode)
z The functions are set in Function Code Display mode. Press the
key to toggle the mode between
Status Display and Function Code Display.
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
* To set Cd008 = 15
Operation
Display
or
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric key
Enter a function code number directly using the numeric keys.
The data of the specified function code number is read and displayed,
and the operation panel waits for numeric data input.
Numeric keys
Enter a numeric value using the numeric keys. Each time a numeral is
entered, the display shifts to the left.
The input numeric value is stored as the new setting and the display
returns to the Function Code Display mode. (To prevent errors, some
function may request confirmation. → See the next page.)
or
z To correct numeric input, press the
The display returns to the Status Display mode.
CLEAR
DISP
key to return to the previous display.
z To cancel function code data input, press the
key to return to Function Code Display mode. (To
cancel a change after pressing
once, do not press
again but press the
key twice to return to
Function Code Display mode.)
CLEAR
DISP
CLEAR
DISP
z Rating selection function (Cd060)
Select H characteristic or P characteristic configurations from the SBT series (SBT-22K/30K or less)
featuring the two-rating specification.
Cd060=1: H characteristics (Constant torque load: overload limit 150%)
Cd060=2: P characteristics (Square-reduced torque load: overload limit 120%)
Note: The default is H characteristics (set value 1).
- 42 -
z Copy function (Cd084)
This function transfers function code data from the inverter to the operation panel or to another inverter.
This function is useful when setting the same function code data to multiple inverters. The same function
code can be set to multiple inverters since after setting the function code data to one of the inverters, the
function code data can be transferred to another inverter.
<Outline of function code>
Cd084 = 1: Transfers the current function code data to the operation panel.
Cd084 = 2: Transfers the memory contents from the operation panel to the inverter.
For more details of function and operation, refer to description of function on Cd084.
Readout
COPY
Transfer
COPY
COPY
z Data initialization (Cd099)
The initial value of the inverter can be set by not only the factory presets but also the value determined by
user (user’s initial value). Data initialization can be selected from either the factory presets or user’s initial
value. By fixing the user’s initial value as the initial value of the inverter, when the function code data is
updated for some reason, this function can initialize the function code data to the user’s initial value. The
function code data can be reset with minimum steps.
<Outline of procedure>
1) Set the required function code.
2) Fix this value as the user’s initial value with Cd099 = 99. (Confirmation message is displayed.)
3) Execute Cd099 = 3 to initialize the function code data to the user’s initial value. Execute Cd099
= 1 to initialize to the factory presets. (Confirmation message is displayed.)
For more details of function and operation, refer to description of function on Cd099.
Data initialization
Provide 2 kinds of initial values as parameters.
The factory presets the initial value
⇒Reset to the factory presets initial value.
+@
+@
+@
+@!
The set maker initial value
⇒Reset to the set maker initial value.
The parameter can be reset with a minimum of steps.
z Changed Code Display Function (Cd140)
This function compares the factory presets, user’s initial value, and current function code data and displays the function codes for which data values are different.
This is useful when checking the difference between current function code data and the factory presets or
user’s initial value. The function code data can be confirmed easily when doing maintenance.
<Outline of procedure>
Cd140 = 1: Displays discrepancies between current function code data and the factory presets.
Cd140 = 2: Displays discrepancies between current function code data and the user’s initial value.
For more details of function and operation, refer to description of function on Cd140.
- 43 -
Changed Code Display Function
Check the changed parameters on the display panel.
Cd000
Compare with the factory presets.
⇒Displays the different code data from
the factory presets.
Compare with the user’s initial value.
Cd001
Cd002
Cd003
Find
⇒Displays the different code data from the user’s initial value.
*The parameters can be confirmed easily
when doing maintenance.
z For the following function code data, confirmation is required to avoid errors.
Where;
Cd007 (Upper frequency limit): 120.00 or more
Cd060 (Rating selection):
1, 2
Cd071 (Motor control mode): 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Cd084 (Copy function):
1, 2
Cd099 (Data initialization):
1, 2, 3, 99
* To set Cd099 = 1
Operation
Display
or
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric keys
Enter a function code number directly using the numeric keys.
The data of the specified function code number is read and displayed,
and the operation panel waits for numeric data input.
Numeric key
*
Enter a numeric value using the numeric keys.





The display toggles between the value and “ready” to indicate the
confirmation mode.
1 is entered as new data and Cd099 is set to 1 (data initialization).
Note:
flashes during initialization.
or
The display returns to the Status Display mode.
- 44 -
* If you notice a setting error while the display is toggling and want to cancel input, follow the steps below.





The display toggles between the value and “ready” to indicate the
confirmation mode.
The display returns to the Function Code Display mode.
CLEAR
DISP
or
The display returns to the Status Display mode.
z To change Cd053 = 42 2.2 to Cd053 = 62 1.5
Operation
Display
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric keys
Enter a function code number directly using the numeric keys.
The data of the specified function code number is read, the number of
motor poles at the leftmost digit flashes waiting for data input.
Change the number of motor poles using the step keys.
Press the ENTER key to enter the number of motor poles. The
flashing cursor shifts to the rated voltage position and waits for data
input.
Press the ENTER key to enter the rated voltage. The flashing cursor
shifts to the motor capacity position and waits for data input.
Change the motor capacity using the step keys.
The input numeric value is stored as the new setting and the display
returns to the Function Code Display mode.
The display returns to the Status Display mode.
- 45 -
z Setting Cd054, Cd055, Cd062, Cd063, Cd068, Cd069, Cd176, and Cd177,
* To set Cd054 = -10
Operation
Display
or
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric keys
Enter a function code number directly using the numeric keys.
The data of the specified function code number is read.
Change the number of motor poles using the step keys.
Numeric keys
Change the data using the numeric keys.
The input numeric value is stored as the new setting and the display
returns to the Function Code Display mode.
or
The display returns to the Status Display mode.
- 46 -
z Setting Cd140
* To display differences from the factory presets
Operation
Display
Description
Status Display mode
Function Code Display mode
Numeric keys
Enter a function code number directly using the numeric keys.
The data of the specified function code number is read.
Numeric key
Change the data using the numeric keys.
Searching for code numbers of functions where user’s settings differ
from the factory presets (
flashes during the search.)
or
Display the code number of the next function code whose
settings have been changed.
Display the code number of the previous function code whose
settings have been changed.
When the code number of a function code whose settings have been
changed is displayed, press
to display the function code data.
Pressing
toggles the display between the function code number
and function code data.
or
CLEAR
DISP
Display the code number of the next function code whose
settings have been changed.
Display the code number of the previous function code whose
settings have been changed.
The display returns to the Function Code Display mode.
The displays returns to the Status Display mode.
Note: The code number and code data of a function code whose settings have been changed flash.
- 47 -
7.2 Function Code List
Code No.
Function
Cd
000
Display selection
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
Data
1: Frequency (Hz)
2: Output current (A)
3: Speed of rotation (rpm)
4: Load factor (%)
5: Output voltage (V)
6: Pressure value (MPa)
7: No units display
Operation command selection
1: Operation panel
2: External terminal signal
3: Communication
1st speed frequency setting
1: Operation panel
2: External analog VRF1 (0 - 5 V)
3: External analog VRF1 (0 - 10 V or
variable resistor)
4: External analog VRF2 (0 - 5 V)
5: External analog VRF2 (0 - 10 V or
variable resistor)
6: External analog IRF (4 - 20 mA)
7: External analog VRF1 + VRF2
8: External analog VRF1 - VRF2
9: External analog VRF2 - VRF1
10: External analog VRF1 + IRF
11: External analog VRF1 - IRF
12: External analog IRF - VRF1
13: Terminal board step
14: Communication
15: BINARY (option)
16: BCD (option)
V/f pattern
1: Linear pattern
2: Square-law decreasing pattern (weak)
3: Square-law decreasing pattern (strong)
Torque boost
0 - 20% (maximum voltage ratio)
Base voltage
200 V system
0: No AVR
30 - 240 V
400 V system
0: No AVR
30 - 460 V
Base frequency
0.1 - 600 Hz
Upper frequency limit
20 - 600 Hz
Lower frequency limit
0.05 - 200 Hz
Starting method
1: Starting frequency
2: Flying start
3: Starting frequency after DC braking
Starting frequency
0.05 - 20 Hz
Operation start frequency
0 - 20 Hz
Start delay time
0 - 5 sec.
Braking method
1: Deceleration to stop
2: Deceleration to stop + DC braking
3: Free run stop
DC braking start frequency
0.2 - 20 Hz
DC braking time
0.1 - 10 sec.
DC braking force
1 - 10
Acceleration/deceleration curve 1: Linear
2: S-shaped
Reference acceleration/
10 - 120 Hz
deceleration frequency
1st acceleration time
0 - 6500 sec.
2nd acceleration time
0 - 6500 sec.
3rd acceleration time
0 - 6500 sec.
4th acceleration time
0 - 6500 sec.
1st deceleration time
0 - 6500 sec.
- 48 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.1%
1V
*1
*1
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
1
*1
60
0.05
1
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.1 s
1
1
0
0
1
0.01 Hz
0.1 s
1
1
0.5
2
5
1
0.01 Hz
*1
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Code No.
Cd
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
Function
2nd deceleration time
3rd deceleration time
4th deceleration time
Jog acceleration/deceleration
time
Jog frequency
1st speed frequency
2nd speed frequency
3rd speed frequency
4th speed frequency
5th speed frequency
6th speed frequency
7th speed frequency
8th speed frequency
1st jump bottom frequency
1st jump top frequency
2nd jump bottom frequency
2nd jump top frequency
3rd jump bottom frequency
3rd jump top frequency
Output current limiting
Data
0 - 6500 sec.
0 - 6500 sec.
0 - 6500 sec.
0 - 20 sec.
0.1 - 60 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
0 to 600 Hz
H characteristic/SHF
P characteristic/SPF
044
Electrothermal level setting
045
Output current limiting during
constant power operation
0: No function
50 - 200%
0: No function
50 - 150%
0: No function
20 - 105%
0: No
1: Yes V/F mode only
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
0.1 s
*7
0.1 s
*8
0.1 s
*9
0.1 s
0.1
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
1%
5
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
150
1%
120
1%
100
1
0
1
0
1
0
(Currently selected acceleration/deceleration time)
2: Yes V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd019,
Cd023: 1st acceleration/deceleration time)
3: Yes V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd020,
Cd024: 2nd acceleration/deceleration time)
4: Yes V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd021,
Cd025: 3rd acceleration/deceleration time)
5: Yes V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd022,
Cd026: 4th acceleration/deceleration time)
6: Yes V/F mode and sensorless vector control
mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd019,
Cd023: 1st acceleration/deceleration time)
7: Yes V/F mode and sensorless vector control
mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd020,
Cd024: 2nd acceleration/deceleration time)
8: Yes V/F mode and sensorless vector control
mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd021,
Cd025: 3rd acceleration/deceleration time)
9: Yes V/F mode and sensorless vector control
mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd022,
Cd026: 4th acceleration/deceleration time)
046
Restart after momentary power
failure
047
Auto alarm recovery
0: Do not restart
1: Restart
2: Compensation for momentary power failure
0: No auto alarm recovery function
1: Auto alarm recovery function
- 49 -
Code No.
Function
Cd
048
Overload alarm level setting
049
050
Duty cycle of brake resistor
Direction of rotation of motor
Note: Cd130 for direction command
from the operation panel
051
052
Carrier frequency
Motor type
053
Motor poles, voltage, and
capacity
054
055
056
057
058
059
Bias frequency (VRF1)
Gain frequency (VRF1)
Approach frequency
Frequency matching range
Multiple for no-units display
Display selection
060
Rating selection
Note: This function is for SBT series only.
061
062
063
Instability elimination
Bias frequency (IRF/VRF2)
Gain frequency (IRF/VRF2)
064
065
066
Discharge resistor on signal output time
Set frequency gain
V·f separate function selection
067
MBS terminal input mode
068
069
070
Internal analog output bias 1
Internal analog output bias 2
ES input terminal function
071
Motor control mode selection
Data
H characteristic/SHF 20 - 200%
P characteristic/SPF
20 - 150%
0: No brake resistor
2 - 25% ED
99: External brake unit
1: Forward and reverse run
2: Forward run only
3: Reverse run only
0 - 130
1: General-purpose motor
2: Motor designed specifically for inverter
XYZZZ
X: Number of motor poles
Y: Rated voltage
Z: Motor capacity
0 to ±600 Hz (frequency at 0 V)
0 to ±600 Hz (frequency at 5 or 10 V)
0 - 600 Hz
0 - 10 Hz
0.01 - 100 (multiple of the output frequency)
1: No units (multiple of CD058)
2: PID feedback frequency [Hz]
3: Command pressure [MPa] (option)
4: Set pressure [MPa] (option)
5: Command frequency [Hz]
6: Fin temperature [°C]
7: Detecting speed [rpm] (option)
8: Regular pump switching integrated time
[H] (option)
9 - 10: Reserved
11: Detecting position [mm] (option)
12: DC voltage [V]
13: Output power [kW] (V/f mode only)
1: H characteristic (150% rating)
2: P characteristic (120% rating)
0 - 20
0 to ± 600 Hz (frequency at 0 or 4 mA)
0 to ± 600 Hz (frequency at 5 V or 10 V or
20 mA)
0.01 - 10 s
0 - 100%
1: V·f comparison
2: Complete separation
1: Level operation
2: Edge operation
0 - ±10.0 V
0 - ±10.0 V
1: NO external thermal signal
2: NC external thermal signal
1: V/f control mode
2: Sensorless vector control mode
3: Internal PID control mode
4: Position control (optional)
5: Speed control (optional)
6: Simple energy-saving mode
7: Auto energy-saving mode 1
8: Auto energy-saving mode 2
9: Auto tuning mode 1
10: Auto tuning mode 2
11: V·f separate control
12: Switching between sensorless vector
control and V/f control
- 50 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1%
150
1%
120
1% ED
*1
1
1
1
1
*1
1
–
*1
0.1 Hz
0.1 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01
1
P0
P60
10
0
1
1
1
1
1
0.1 Hz
0.1 Hz
*1
P0
P60
0.01 s
1
0.1
0
1
1
1
0.1 V
0.1 V
1
1
P0
P0
1
1
1
Code No.
Function
Cd
072
Torque limiter (power running)
073
074
077
078
079
Torque limiter (regeneration)
Multiple for starting excitation
current
Starting excitation time
Multiple for braking excitation
current
Braking excitation time
Motor current rating
Motor frequency rating
080
081
Motor speed rating
Motor isolation type
082
083
Speed adjustment gain
External analog input filter
time constant
Copy function
075
076
084
085
Torque limiter analog input
function (power running)
086
Torque limiter analog input
function (regeneration)
087
Function to switch between
“OV” and “LV” alarms when
stopped
088
089
090
091
092
ASR proportional gain
ASR integral gain
Start of S-shaped acceleration
End of S-shaped acceleration
Gradient of middle of S-shaped
acceleration
Start of S-shaped deceleration
End of S-shaped deceleration
Gradient of middle of S-shaped
deceleration
093
094
095
Data
H characteristic/SHF: 5 - 200%
P characteristic/SPF: 5 - 150%
5 - 100%
1 - 10 (for applicable motor)
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1%
100
1%
1
*1
5
0 - 10 (for no starting excitation)
1 - 10 (for applicable motor)
0.1 s
1
*1
5
0 - 10 (for no starting excitation)
Approx. 30 - 110% of inverter current rating
1: 50 Hz
2: 60 Hz
0 to 24,000 rpm
1: Type A
2: Type E
3: Type B
4: Type F
5: Type H
0.5 - 2
1 - 500 (set value: 1 = 10 ms)
0.1 s
0.1 A
1
1
*1
*1
1 rpm
1
*1
*1
0.01
10 ms
1
10
1
0
1
0
1
0
1: Transfer the current code data to the
operation panel
2: Transfer the operation panel memory to
the inverter
0: Limit using Cd072
1: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0 to 5 V)
2: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0 to 10 V or variable resistor)
3: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0 to 5 V)
4: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0 to 10 V or variable resistor)
5: Limit using the signal on the IRF terminal
(4 to 20 mA)
0: Limit using Cd073
1: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0 to 5 V)
2: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0 to 10 V or variable resistor)
3: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0 to 5 V)
4: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0 to 10 V or variable resistor)
5: Limit using the signal on the IRF
terminal (4 to 20 mA)
0: OV enabled, LV disabled during stop
1: OV disabled, LV enabled during stop
2: OV disabled, LV disabled during stop
3: OV enabled, LV enabled during stop
0 - 7.8
0 - 106
0 - 100%
0 - 100%
0 - 100%
1
0
0.01
0.01
1%
1%
1%
*1
*1
50
50
0
0 - 100%
0 - 100%
0 - 100%
1%
1%
1%
50
50
0
- 51 -
Code No.
Function
Cd
096
Function lock
097
098
Operation time display
Reading alarm data
099
Data initialization
100
Operation panel remote/local
selection
Operation mode selection
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
Simple scheduled operation
repetition
Operation timer T1
Operation timer T2
Operation timer T3
Operation timer T4
Operation timer T5
Operation timer T6
Operation timer T7
Operation stop timer T0
Midway stop deceleration time
Midway start acceleration time
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T1
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T2
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T3
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T4
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T5
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T6
Forward/reverse and
acceleration/deceleration in T7
Analog input switching
(for PID, disturb, energy
saving, and set frequency gain)
Disturb modulation rate or
simple energy saving rate
PID control proportional gain
PID control integral gain
PID control differential gain
Data
0: Code data changeable (No lock function)
1: Code data unchangeable (except Cd096)
2: Code data unchangeable (except Cd096
and Cd028 to Cd036)
3: Code data unchangeable (except Cd096 or
using communication function)
4: Code data unchangeable (except for Cd096,
Cd175 or Cd182, pressure command.)
Read only
0
1: Read start
9: Record erase
0
1: Initialize factory presets
2: Invalid constant by auto tuning
3: Initialize user’s data
99: Set user’s initialization value
0
1: Toggle function (optional)
0: Normal operation
1: Simple scheduled operation
2: Disturbed operation
0: Continuous
1 - 250: Repetition count
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
0 - 65,000 s
1 - 4: Data of Cd023 - Cd026
1 - 4: Data of Cd019 - Cd022
XY
X ... 1: Forward run
2: Reverse run
Y ... 1 - 4: Acceleration/
deceleration time specified
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1
0
1 hour
1
–
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1s
1
1
–
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
1
11
–
11
–
11
–
11
–
21
–
21
–
21
0: No analog input
1: External analog VRF1 (0 - 5 V)
2: External analog VRF1 (0 - 10 V or
variable resistor)
3: External analog VRF2 (0 - 5 V)
4: External analog VRF2 (0 - 10 V or
variable resistor)
5: External analog IRF (4 - 20 mA)
0 - 50%
1
0
1%
0
0 - 100
0 - 100
0 - 100
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.1
0.1
0
- 52 -
Code No.
Function
Cd
125
Feedback input filter time
constant
126
Internal analog output
function 1
127
128
129
Internal analog output
coefficient 1
Internal analog output
function 2
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
Internal analog output
coefficient 2
Direction of rotation of motor
(Operation panel)
Shortest operation time function
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
2nd Upper frequency limit
3rd Upper frequency limit
Changed code display function
141
142
Reserved
Message checksum
143
RS232C/RS485 switching
144
Pull-up/down function
145
Reserved
130
Data
1 - 500 (set value 1 = 10 ms)
0: No function
1: Set frequency
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: DC voltage
5: Fin temperature
6: Load factor (Electrothermal level integrated
value)
7: Output of converted analog input value
(VRF1 control circuit terminal input)
8: Output of converted analog input value
(IRF/VRF2 control circuit terminal input)
9: Output voltage
10: Load factor (Percentage in terms of rated
current)
11:Detected speed (option)
12:Output power (V/f mode only)
0 - 20 Times
0: No function
1: Set frequency
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: DC voltage
5: Fin temperature
6: Load factor (Electrothermal level integrated
value)
7: Output of converted analog input value
(VRF1 control circuit terminal input)
8: Output of converted analog input value
(IRF/VRF2 control circuit terminal input)
9: Output voltage
10: Load factor (Percentage in terms of rated
current)
11:Detected speed (option)
12:Output power (V/f mode only)
0 - 20 Times
1: Forward
2: Reverse
0 - 99.99
5 - 600 Hz
5 - 600 Hz
0
1: Display differences from factory preset
2: Display differences from user’s
initialization data
0: No
1: Yes
1: RS232C
2: RS485
0: No
1: Yes
- 53 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
10 ms
10
1
0
0.01
1
1
0
0.01
1
1
1
0.01 s
0
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
1
60
60
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
Code No.
Function
Cd
146
Communication function
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
Data
0: No function
1: Serial communication function
Inverter No.
1 - 32
Communication speed
1: 1200bps
2: 2400bps
3: 4800bps
4: 9600bps
5: 19200bps
Parity bit
0: None
1: Odd
2: Even
Stop bit
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bits
End bit
0: CR,LF
1: CR
Inverter’s response to specified 0: Sent
commands
1: Not sent (Error response sent)
2: Not sent (Error response not sent)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Feed pump control selection
0: No feed pump control
(Option)
1-14: Feed pump mode
Motor setting M1
0: M1 not used 1: M1 used
(This setting is invalid for mode 1-8.)
Motor setting M2
0: M2 not used 1: M2 used
Motor setting M3
0: M3 not used 1: M3 used
Motor setting M4
0: M4 not used 1: M4 used
Motor setting M5
0: M5 not used 1: M5 used
(This setting is invalid for mode 9-12.)
Motor setting M6
0: M6 not used 1: M6 used
(This setting is invalid for mode 9-12.)
Motor setting M7
0: M7 not used 1: M7 used
(This setting is invalid for mode 5-12.)
Magnetic contactor switching
0.10-2.00 s
time (Tmc)
Maximum limiter duration time (Th) 0.1-10 min
Minimum limiter duration time (Tl) 0.1-10 min
Auxiliary pump switching ratio (K) 30-95%
Auxiliary pump return determining 0.1-10 min
time (Tp)
Full-voltage starting acceleration 0.1-25.5 s
time (Ta)
Full-voltage starting deceleration 0.1-25.5 s
time (Td)
Pressure command (Pref)
0-9.999MPa
Analog feedback bias pressure (Pb) 0-±9.999MPa
Analog feedback gain pressure (Pg) 0-±9.999MPa
Upper pressure value limit (Ph) 0.001-9.999MPa
Lower pressure value limit (Pl)
0-9.999MPa
Gradient of pressure acceleration 0.001-9.999MPa
/deceleration
Motor switching allowable
0-20%
deviation
2nd pressure command (Pref2)
0-9.999MPa
Maximum limiter duration time (Th2) 0.1-10 min
- 54 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1
0
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0.01 s
1
0.1 min
0.1 min
1%
0.1min
5
5
50
5
0.1 s
5
0.1 s
5
0.001MPa
0.001MPa
0.001MPa
0.001MPa
0.001MPa
0.001MPa
0
P0
P0
1
0
0.1
0.1%
0
0.001MPa
0.1 min
0
5
Code No.
Function
Cd
184
Minimum limiter duration time (Tl2)
185
Regular pump switching time (Tch)
186
Regular pump switching signal
output time (Tchs)
187
Motor switching function
191
192
193
194
195
196
Relay output function (RY3)
Relay output function (RY4)
Relay output function (RY5)
Relay output function (RY6)
Relay output function (RY7)
Relay output function (RY8)
Contact is on when operating
(Option)
197
Point to Point control position
limiter
Point to Point control smallest
position unit
198
199
600
Simple backlash calibration
Command pulse format
601
Command pulse logic
602
PG pulse output divisor
603
Deviation counter clear mode
604
PG pulse multiplication value
605
PG switch
Data
0.1-10 min
0-720, 999 h
0-120 s
0: Select by function code
1: Select by external signal
0: Output at alarm status
1: In operation 1
2: Low voltage
3: End of simple scheduled operation
4: In operation 2
5: Frequency matching (1st speed frequency)
6: Frequency matching (1st to 8th speed
frequencies)
7: Frequency approach
8: Overload alarm level setting (Cd048 value.
Output only in constant operation.)
9: Electrothermal level signal (Electrothermal 80%)
10: Fin heat prediction signal
11: Reserved
12: Reserved
13: Excitation and DC braking
14: Lower frequency limit matching
15: Upper frequency limit matching
16: Reserved
17: Reserved
18: FR signal 19: RR signal
20: 2DF signal 21: 3DF signal
22: AD2 signal 23: AD3 signal
24: JOG signal 25: MBS signal
26: ES signal 27: RST signal
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Discharge resistor ON-signal
31 - 33: Reserved
34: Overload alarm signal (Cd048 value.
Output when in operation.)
35 - 99: Reserved (*): Option
1 - 32767 mm
1: 1 mm
2: 0.1 mm
3: 0.01 mm
0 - ±5000 pulses
1: Forward and reverse pulse train
2: Coded pulse train
3: Two-phase pulse train
1: Positive logic
2: Negative logic
1: 1/1
2: 1/2
3: 1/4
4: 1/8
5: 1/16
1: Level operation (the counter is cleared
when it is on.)
2: Edge operation (the counter is cleared
when it is on.)
1: × 1
2: × 2
3: × 4
1: Compatible with line driver PG
2: Compatible with open collector PG
- 55 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
0.1 min
5
1h
0
1s
120
1
0
1
1
5
6
8
10
13
1 mm
32767
1
1
1 pulse
P0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
Code No.
Function
Cd
606
Position control gain
607
Positioning complete width
608
Error level limit
609
610
611
612
Position control acceleration
/deceleration
Number of pulses within 1 mm
Point to Point control position
command
Electric gear function selection
613
614
615
Electric gear A data
Electric gear B data
Zero servo control function
selection
616
617
618
619
Zero-speed
Zero servo complete width
Number of PG pulses
Observer gain setting ration
620
Observer time constant
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
Selection of input terminal DI1
Selection of input terminal DI2
Selection of input terminal DI3
Selection of input terminal DI4
Selection of input terminal DI5
Selection of input terminal DI6
Selection of input terminal DI7
Selection of input terminal DI8
Data
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
0.1 rad/s
1
1 pulse
100
1000 pulses 100
0.1 - 50 rad/s
0 - 32767 pulses
0: No alarm function
1 - 1000 (set value 1=1000 pulses)
0: Inactive
1
1: Active
0: Pulse is specified with Cd0611
1 pulse
1 - 32767 pulses
0: No control
0.01 - 1 mm
0.01 - 32767 mm
0: Inactive
1
1: Active
1 - 100 (Setting accuracy: 1)
1
1 - 100 (Setting accuracy: 1)
1
0: No function
1
1: Zero servo switching at zero-speed
2: Zero servo switching at external terminal
(PO)
1 - 3000 rpm
1 rpm
5 - 10000 pulses
1 pulse
500 - 2048 pulses
1 pulse
0 - 7.8 (SHF-75K or higher, function invalid
0.01
for SPF-90K or higher)
0 - 7.8 (SHF-75K or higher, function invalid
0.01
for SPF-90K or higher)
0: Not used 1: FR 2: RR 3:2DF 4:3DF 5: MBS
1
6: ES 7: RST 8: AD2 9:AD3 10:JOG
11: FR+JOG 12: RR+JOG 13: FR+AD2
14: RR+AD2 15: FR+AD3 16: RR+AD3
17: FR+2DF 18: RR+2DF 19: FR+3DF
20: RR+3DF 21: FR+2DF+3DF
22: RR+2DF+3DF 23: FR+AD2+2DF
24: RR+AD2+2DF 25: FR+AD2+3DF
26: RR+AD2+3DF 27: FR+AD2+2DF+3DF
28: RR+AD2+2DF+3DF 29: FR+AD3+2DF
30: RR+AD3+2DF 31: FR+AD3+3DF
32: RR+AD3+3DF 33: FR+AD3+2DF+3DF
34: RR+AD3+2DF+3DF 35:PTR 36: IF
37: 5DF 38: HD 39:2P(*) 40:2PT(*) 41:TCL(*)
42:2P+2PT(*) 43:CP 44:CCL 45:PC 46:PID
47:PM1(*) 48:PM2(*) 49:PM3(*) 50:PM4(*)
51:PM5(*) 52:PM6(*) 53:PM7(*)
54: Reserved 55:P0
56:FR+CCL(*) 57:RR+CCL(*)
58-61: Reserved
62:FR+MBS 63:RR+MBS 64: Reserved
65:2DF+AD2 66:2DF+AD3 67:3DF+AD2
68:3DF+AD3
69:A × 10 70:A × 100
71: v/f
72: 2MAX
73: 3MAX
74-99: Reserved (*):option
- 56 -
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
30
10
1000
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Code No.
Setting Factory User’s
Function
Data
Cd
resolution preset setting
638
Selection of output terminal DO1 0: Not used 1: In operation 1 2: Low voltage
1
1
639
Selection of output terminal DO2 3: End of simple scheduled operation
5
640
Selection of output terminal DO3 4: In operation 2
8
5: Frequency matching (1st speed frequency)
6: Frequency matching (1st to 8th speed
frequencies)
7: Frequency approach
8: Overload alarm level setting (Cd048 value.
Output only in constant operation.)
9: Electrothermal level signal
(Electrothermal 80%)
10: Fin heat prediction signal
11: Auxiliary pump driving signal (*)
12: Regular pump switching signal (*)
13: Excitation and DC braking
14: Lower frequency limit matching
15: Upper frequency limit matching
16: Servo on signal (option)
17: Zero servo completion signal (option)
18: FR signal 19: RR signal 20: 2DF signal
21: 3DF signal 22: AD2 signal
23: AD3 signal 24: JOG signal
25: MBS signal 26: ES signal 27: RST signal
28 : Switching standby signal (*)
29: Positioning completion signal (option)
30: Discharge resistor on signal
31: Reserved
32: Frequency counter output (Output frequency)
33: Frequency counter output (Command
frequency)
34: Overload alarm signal (Cd048 value.
Output when in operation.)
35 - 99: Reserved (*): Option
641
Start standby time
0 - 120
0.1 s
0
642
Start standby frequency
0.05 - 60
0.01 Hz
5
670
Magnification of frequency
1-10
by 1
1
counter output
671
Cooling fan ON function
0: Cooling fan ON/OFF control
1
0
Note: Supported only for cooling fan
1: Cooling fan ON normally
ON/OFF control model
672
673
Missing phase detection function 0: Missing input phase detection is invalid,
missing output phase detection is invalid.
1: Missing input phase detection is valid,
missing output phase detection is invalid.
2: Missing input phase detection is invalid,
missing output phase detection is valid.
3: Missing input phase detection is valid,
missing output phase detection is valid.
Overvoltage stalling prevention 0: Overvoltage stalling prevention function inactive.
function
1: Overvoltage stalling prevention function active.
- 57 -
1
3
1
1
Code No.
Function
Cd
674
Relay contact output selection
675
676
677
678
679
680
Data
0: Output at alarm status
1: In operation 1 2: Low voltage
3: End of simple scheduled operation
4: In operation 2
5: Frequency matching (1st speed frequency)
6: Frequency matching (1st to 8th speed
frequencies)
7: Frequency approach
8: Overload alarm level setting (Cd048 value.
Output only in constant operation.)
9: Electrothermal level signal (Electrothermal 80%)
10: Fin heat prediction signal
11: Auxiliary pump driving signal (*)
12: Regular pump switching signal (*)
13: Excitation and DC braking
14: Lower frequency limit matching
15: Upper frequency limit matching
16: Servo ON-signal (*)
17: Zero servo completion signal (*)
18: FR signal 19: RR signal 20: 2DF signal
21: 3DF signal 22: AD2 signal
23: AD3 signal 24: JOG signal
25: MBS signal 26: ES signal 27: RST signal
28: Switching standby signal (*)
29: Positioning completion signal (*)
30: Discharge resistor ON-signal
31 - 33: Reserved
34: Overload alarm signal
(Cd048 value. Output when in operation.)
35 - 99: Reserved (*): Option
Optional V/f pattern intermediate 0-460 V
voltage 1
Optional V/f pattern intermediate 0-460 V
voltage 2
Optional V/f pattern intermediate 0.05-600 Hz
frequency 1
Optional V/f pattern intermediate 0.05-600 Hz
frequency 2
Current output magnification
0-20
(option)
Feedback signal disconnection 0-120 seconds 120: Function invalid
detection time
: The setting cannot be changed during operation.
*1 Typical constants for each model are entered.
*2 - *9 See the following table:
- 58 -
Setting Factory User’s
resolution preset setting
1
0
1V
0
1V
0
0.01Hz
20
0.01Hz
40
by 0.01
1
0.01 s
5
Type
SBT
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
Cd019 Cd020 Cd021 Cd022 Cd023 Cd024 Cd025 Cd026
SBT-0.75K/1.5K - 7.5K/11K
SHF-1.5K - SHF-7.5K
SPF-2.2K - SHF-11K
5
10
15
20
5
10
15
20
SBT-11K/15K, 15K/18.5K
SHF-11K, 15K
SPF-15K, 18.5K
15
30
45
60
15
30
45
60
SBT-18.5K/22K, 22K/30K
SBT-30K-55K
SHF-18.5K-SHF-55K
SPF-22K-SPF-55K
30
60
90
120
30
60
90
120
SHF-75K, 90K
SPF-90K, 110K
60
120
180
240
60
120
180
240
SHF-110K - SHF-250K
SPF-132K - SPF-315K
75
150
225
300
75
150
225
300
- 59 -
7.3 Description of Functions
Cd002=2:
Setting by analog signal input to the
VRF1 terminal (0 to 5 V)
Cd002=3: Setting by analog signal input to the
VRF1 terminal (0 to 10 V or variable
resistor)
Cd002=4: Setting by analog signal input to the
VRF2 terminal (0 to 5 V)
Cd002=5: Setting by analog signal input to the
VRF2 terminal (0 to 10 V or variable
resistor)
Cd002=6: Setting by analog signal input to the IRF
terminal (4 to 20 mA)
Cd002=7: Setting by the sum of analog signal
inputs to the VRF1 and VRF2 terminals
(VRF1+VRF2)
Cd002=8: Setting by the difference in analog signal
inputs to the VRF1 and VRF2 terminals
(VRF1-VRF2)
Cd002=9: Setting by the difference in analog signal
inputs to the VRF2 and VRF1 terminals
(VRF2-VRF1)
Cd002=10: Setting by the sum of analog signal
inputs to the VRF1 and IRF terminals
(VRF1+IRF)
Cd002=11: Setting by the difference in analog signal
inputs to the VRF1 and IRF terminals
(VRF1-IRF)
Cd002=12: Setting by the difference in analog signal
inputs to the IRF and VRF1 terminals
(IRF-VRF1)
Cd002=13: Setting using the step function of the
terminal board
Cd002=14: Setting using the communication
function
Cd002=15: BINARY (option)
Cd002=16: BCD (option)
z Frequency analog input operation function
• This function calculates the command frequency of
the inverter from the two signals from the VRF1 and
IRF/VRF2 (frequency command) analog input
terminals of the control circuit. The inverter
converts the input command on each terminal into a
frequency by checking the bias and gain code. The
results are added or subtracted according to the
value of Cd002.
• A negative result is always regarded as 0. The
upper limit is determined from the upper frequency
limit of Cd007.
z Cd002=13 The step function of the terminal board
• The step function allows the set frequency to be
increased or decreased in steps by input to the
control terminals of the inverter.
Display Function
z This function switches the value displayed on the 7segment display.
Cd000=1: Frequency (Hz)
Cd000=2: Output current (A)
Cd000=3: Speed of rotation (r/min)
Cd000=4: Load factor (%)
Cd000=5: Output voltage (V)
Cd000=6: Pressure value (MPa)
Cd000=7: No units display
z In the Stopped, Standby, and In Operation statuses,
the display values and formats change as follows:
Cd000
Stopped
Standby/In Operation
1
The set frequency
flashes.
The output frequency
lights.
2
0 [A] flashes.
0 [A] lights.
3
120 × preset frequency/
120 × preset frequency/
no. of motor poles flashes. no. of motor poles lights.
4
0 [%] flashes.
Output current/inverter
rated current × 100[%]
lights.
5
0 [V] flashes.
The output voltage lights.
6
The PID feedback pressure The PID feedback
value flashes.
pressure value lights.
7
The output display can be changed using Cd059.
z The value of Cd053 is used for the number of poles.
Operation Command Selection
z This function is used to select whether to start or stop
the inverter from the operation panel or through an
external terminal.
Cd001=1: Operation from the operation panel
Cd001=2: Operation through an external terminal
(However, the STOP key on the operation panel will
work.)
Cd001=3: Operation using the communication
function
z If Cd001=2 (external terminal), the input signals to
control terminals FR and RR become valid.
Inputs to other control terminals are always valid,
regardless of the value of Cd001.
Note: Even when the inverter is not operating, Cd001=1
cannot be changed if signals are being input to either
FR or RR.
1st Speed Frequency Setting
z This function is used to select a method of frequency
setting for 1st speed operation.
Cd002=1: Setting from the operation panel
- 60 -
Note 1: The step function is used not only for setting the
frequency for the first speed but also for setting the
frequencies for multiple speeds.
For example, when you directly connect the 2DF
terminal and the DCM1 terminal (to select the
second speed) and select the step-up function
while setting a frequency for the second speed, the
set frequency for the second speed changes.
On the other hand, when a speed change is made
during the step-up or down operation, the frequency for the preceding speed is set.
Note 2: The step function is disabled when the function lock
(Cd096=1,3) is selected or at undervoltage.
Note 3: When the terminals AD2 and AD3 are both
connected to either DCM1 or DCM2 or both left
open, the set frequency remains unchanged.
Note 4: The new frequency set using the step function is
reflected in the current multi-speed frequency code
(Cd028 to Cd036).
This function is useful when it is difficult to input an
analog frequency externally or set a frequency from
the operation panel.
1) Related function codes and multifunctional input
terminals
Function code
Multifunctional input terminal
Cd002=13
AD2
Up terminal
(Step)
AD3
Down terminal
DCM1 Digital signal common terminal
DCM2 Digital signal common terminal
• If step setting (Cd002=13) is selected for the
first speed frequency, a frequency setting
value can be entered only from external control
input terminals AD2 and AD3 of the inverter.
Note: The frequency cannot be changed from the
operation panel.
• The AD2 terminal is used to increment the set
frequency and the AD3 terminal to decrement
the set frequency.
z Other notes
Note 1: Even if Cd002=2 - 12, 15, 16 is selected during the
multi-step speed operation (2nd thru 8th speeds) or
jog operation, the frequency set by Cd028 or Cd030
- 036 becomes effective.
Note 2: Use a variable resistor of 5k Ω with a rating of 0.3W
or more.
Note 3: When changing the frequency setting using a
variable resistor, set the value of the gain frequency (Cd055) to about 10% higher than the
actual desired frequency value.
Note: When Cd002=13 is selected, the AD2 and
AD3 terminals set using Cd630 to Cd637
cannot be used for the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th
acceleration/deceleration command.
2) Increasing or decreasing the set frequency
• Increasing the set frequency
Directly connect the AD2 terminal to the
DCM1 or DCM2 terminal of the inverter. The
set frequency increases gradually from the
current value.
• Decreasing the set frequency
Directly connect the AD3 terminal to the
DCM1 or DCM2 terminal of the inverter. The
set frequency decreases gradually from the
current value.
• Frequency change steps
When increasing or decreasing the set
frequency, at first the second decimal place of
the set frequency changes for about two
seconds, next the first decimal place of the
frequency changes for about two seconds,
then the ones unit of the frequency changes.
Steady
status
Example: To set the frequency from 0-60 Hz using a
variable resistor, set Cd055=66 Hz.
V/f Pattern Selection
z The voltage and frequency responses are selectable
from one linear and two square-law decreasing
characteristics.
Cd003=1: Linear V/f pattern (for constant torque
load)
Cd003=2: Square-law decreasing V/f weak (for
reduced torque load)
Cd003=3: Square-law decreasing V/f strong (for
reduced torque load)
Steady
status
Output
voltage
Cd003 = 1
Cd003 = 2
Set
frequency
Cd003 = 3
Output frequency
Increasing
Short-circuit
between AD2
and DCM1/2
Short-circuit
between AD3
and DCM1/2
Shortcircuit
Increasing Increasing
Decreasing
z Optional V/f pattern can be selected for linear V/f
pattern. (This is effective when using special motors.)
Refer to the related function code Cd675-Cd678.
Optional V/f pattern has 2 intermediate points in the
regular V/f pattern. V/f pattern is formed through these
2 points. Optional V/f pattern is described below.
Shortcircuit
Shortcircuit
Shortcircuit
- 61 -
z Optional V/f pattern is valid when both intermediate
voltages 1 and 2 (Cd675 and Cd676) are not 0. When
there is one intermediate point, set Cd675=Cd676 and
Cd677=Cd678.
Output voltage V →
Base voltage
(Cd005)
Output
voltage
20%
C
Adjustable range
0
Intermediate
voltage 1
(Cd675)
Starting
frequency
(Cd010)
100%
D
Intermediate
voltage 2
(Cd676)
Torque boost
(Cd004)
Cd004 = 0 - 20% (in 0.1% step)
Output frequency
B
z An excessive increase will cause an excessive current,
possibly activating the output current limiting
function. To avoid this, confirm the output current
before making this adjustment.
A
Intermediate Intermediate
frequency 1 frequency 2
(Cd677)
(Cd678)
Base frequency
(Cd006)
Base frequency
Upper frequency
limit
(Cd007)
Output frequency F →
Note 1: Optional V/f pattern can only be valid for Cd003 = 1:
linear V/f pattern.
Note 2: When the intermediate voltage 1 and 2 is not zero
and lower than the voltage determined by Cd004:
torque boost, the voltage will be limited by voltage
command determined by torque boost.
Note 3: When the intermediate voltage 1 and 2 is higher
than the voltage determined by Cd005: base
voltage, the voltage will be limited by base voltage.
Note 4: When the intermediate frequency 1 and 2 is lower
than Cd010: starting frequency, the frequency will
be limited by starting frequency.
Note 5: When the intermediate frequency 1 and 2 is higher
than Cd006: base frequency, the frequency will be
limited by base frequency.
Note 6: Using optional V/f pattern, the inverter output
command sometimes changes dramatically or
becomes overexcited. Pay attention when changing
the values setting during operation and the set
values. (Change the value gradually and check the
motor voltage.)
Note 7: Intermediate points B and C of the optional V/f
pattern are determined as follows depending on the
setting of intermediate voltages 1 and 2 and
intermediate frequencies 1 and 2.
Point B: Crossing of the smaller set value of
intermediate voltages 1 and 2 and the
smaller set value of intermediate
frequencies 1 and 2.
Point C: Crossing of the larger set value of
intermediate voltages 1 and 2 and the larger
set value of intermediate frequencies 1 and 2.
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
z These functions determine the V/f pattern including
the base voltage and the base frequency appropriate
to the characteristics of the motor in use.
Cd005=0: The base voltage is equal to the highest
possible output voltage that is determined by the input voltage. No automatic output voltage control is available.
Cd005=30 - 460 (V):
Base voltage. Automatic output voltage
control is performed. (30 - 240V for 200V
system)
Cd006=0.1 - 600Hz:
(in 0.01Hz step)
Base
voltage
(Cd005)
Output
voltage
Output frequency
Base frequency
(Cd006)
Upper frequency
limit (Cd007)
Note: General-purpose inverters do not output a voltage
higher than the input voltage. Therefore, the range of
automatic voltage control specified by the above
functions depends on the highest possible input
voltage. Cd005=230V may be set for a 200V system,
for example, but 230V will not actually be output,
though such a setting will serve to make the V/f
pattern steeper.
z When Cd003=2 or 3, the inverter can be operated more
effectively with Cd045=1 (provides a function to limit
the output current during constant power operation).
Note 8: When “Cd071=7” (Auto Energy-Saving Mode 1) is
selected, the linear V/f pattern is set independently
of the value of Cd003.
Upper Frequency Limit
Lower Frequency Limit
Torque Boost
z These functions specify the upper and lower frequency limits.
z To compensate for torque deficiency of the motor in
the low frequency range, the V/f pattern shown in the
figure below is available.
- 62 -
z Mistakes in using the operation panel or errors in
external signals may cause an over frequency or a
frequency setting that does not fall within the allowable rotation speed range of the motor. Cd007 and
Cd008 provide protection against such errors.
Cd007=30 - 600Hz (in 0.01Hz step)
Cd008=0.05 - 200Hz (in 0.01Hz step)
z Although a frequency exceeding the upper limit can be
specified, an output frequency higher than the upper
limit is not actually output.
z Although a lower frequency than the lower limit can
be specified, an output frequency lower than the lower
limit is not actually output.
z The lower frequency limit must be greater than the
starting frequency (Cd010) and the operation start
frequency (Cd011).
Output
frequency
Operation signal
Output
frequency
Cd009 = 2
Frequency
equivalent to
motor speed
Cd009 = 1
Starting
frequency
Time
t=0
Note 1: The flying start function may not be effective when
the capacity of the motor is much smaller than that
of the inverter or when the free-running speed of
the motor is very low.
Note 2: If the inverter starts a free-running motor with a low
frequency, an excessive current may generate and
trip the circuit breakers. This function detects not
only the free running speed but also the direction of
rotation of the motor to eliminate the starting shock
to the motor. This function can start the motor in a
predetermined rotation direction without any shock
even when the motor is free-running in reverse, for
example due to a back wind.
Upper
frequency
limit
Braking method:
Free run stop
(Cd013=3)
Free-running
Lower frequency limit
Motor rotation
Forward
Frequency setting signal
Note: In P-characteristic V/f constant mode, the maximum
output frequency shall actually be limited to 200 Hz
regardless of the upper frequency limit set by Cd007.
Decelerating to stop (Flying)
Starts normally
Reverse
Accelerating
normally
ON
FR (Forward)
OFF
ON
Starting Method
RR (Reverse)
z This function selects a starting method.
Cd009=1: Start using the starting frequency
Cd009=2: Flying start
Cd009=3: Start after DC braking using starting
frequency
z The “flying start” is used to detect the rotation speed
of a free-running motor and to turn on power to the
motor with a frequency equivalent to the rotation
speed. This function can reduce the starting shock to
the motor. In this case, be sure to turn on the magnetic contactors (MCs) if any between the motor and
the inverter before applying an operation signal.
z Start after DC braking using starting frequency:
This is useful for starting a motor smoothly in cases
such as when a fan is being blown by a back wind and
spinning in the reverse direction. Applying the DC
braking to the spinning motor helps reduce the
starting shock to the motor. To set DC braking, refer
to Cd014 - 016.
z Flying start is applied after auto alarm recovery and
restart after a momentary power failure, irrespective of
the setting of Cd009.
OFF
Forward
Output
frequency
Reverse
Starting Frequency
z The inverter starts to operate with this frequency. If
the set frequency is lower than starting frequency, the
inverter does not start.
Cd010=0.05 - 20Hz (in 0.01Hz step)
Example 1: Cd010=20Hz and set frequency=50Hz:
When operation signal is turned on, the
inverter outputs 20Hz, and then goes up
to 50Hz according to the specified
acceleration curve.
Example 2: Cd010=20Hz and set frequency=15Hz
When operation signal is turned on, the
inverter remains in standby and does not
output.
z Once the inverter starts, it continues to run even if a
frequency lower than the starting frequency (but not
lower than operation start frequency) is specified
afterwards.
- 63 -
z When the stop signal is input, the inverter stops
output as soon as the output frequency becomes
lower than starting frequency (when DC braking
function is not used).
Braking Method
z This function allows a stop mode to be selected when
inputting a stop signal.
Cd013=1: Deceleration & stop
A normal stop mode in which the output
frequency depends on the settings for
the acceleration/deceleration mode
(Cd017) and the deceleration time
(Cd023-026).
Cd013=2: Deceleration + DC braking to stop
The output frequency decreases as with
Cd013=1 until it becomes lower than DC
braking start frequency (Cd014), at which
point the DC braking is applied to stop
the motor quickly. The DC braking time
and the DC braking force depend on
Cd015 and Cd016.
Cd013=3: Free run stop
When input of the stop signal is input,
all drive signals from the main switching
device are turned off to allow the motor
to run free.
Operation Start Frequency
z This frequency value is used to determine whether the
inverter can operate or not.
Cd011=0 - 20Hz (in 0.01Hz step)
z If the set frequency equals or exceeds the levels of the
operation start frequency and the starting frequency,
the inverter starts operating at the starting frequency.
If a frequency below the operation start frequency is
set during operation, the inverter enters a standby
state, and the output frequency drops to the starting
frequency and then output stops. In this case, the
operation mode indicator on the operation panel
flashes, indicating the standby state.
This function is useful for starting or stopping the
inverter using only an external frequency command.
Example: Cd011=20Hz, Cd002=3 for the frequency
setting using a variable resistor.
By the adjusting the variable resistor, the
output starts when the command frequency
is 20Hz or higher. At a frequency lower
than 20Hz, the output frequency goes down
to the starting frequency, and output stops.
DC Braking Start Frequency
DC Braking Time
DC Braking Force
z The frequency at which DC braking is applied, the DC
braking time and DC braking force can be specified
using these function codes.
Cd014=0.2 - 20Hz (in 0.01 Hz steps)
Cd015=0.1 - 10 sec. (in 0.1 sec. steps)
Cd016=1 - 10 (in steps of 1)
z When Cd013=2, the output frequency drops when a
stop signal is input. When the frequency is less than
that set by Cd014, DC braking starts.
z When Cd013=2, the starting frequency (Cd010) is
invalid during braking. The output frequency decreases down to the frequency specified by Cd014,
and DC braking is applied.
z DC braking at operation start:
DC braking is applied after the operation signal is
input and start-up conditions are met. After braking,
the inverter starts with the starting frequency. The
braking time and the braking force specified by
function codes Cd015 and Cd016 apply in this case.
For a description of DC braking operation at operation
start, refer to Cd009.
z If the set frequency is less than the operation start
frequency and the DC braking start frequency when
the operation signal is input, operation is as follows,
Start Delay Time
z This function is used to set the time until the inverter
starts operation after inputting an operation signal.
Cd012=0 - 5 (sec.) (in 0.1 sec. step)
z This function is useful for setting the delay time with a
sequence circuit for changeover between inverter/
mains power, etc.
z When a switch between the motor and the inverter
turns on at the same time as input of the operation
signal, set Cd012 to approximately 0.5 sec.
z Flying start is used for auto alarm recovery.
Operation signal
Output
frequency
Time
Delay time
- 64 -
depending on the operation start frequency and the
DC braking start frequency.
(1) Operation start frequency > DC braking start
frequency
When the set frequency is lower than the
operation start frequency, the output frequency
is reduced to the DC braking start frequency, and
DC braking is applied even if the set frequency is
greater than the DC braking start frequency.
(2) Operation start frequency < DC braking start
frequency
• Even if the set frequency is less than the DC
braking start frequency, operation continues if
the set frequency is greater than the operation
start frequency.
• If the output frequency is greater than the DC
braking start frequency when a set frequency
lower than the operation start frequency is
specified, the output frequency is reduced to
the DC braking start frequency, and DC
braking is applied as in (1).
• If the output frequency is less than the DC
braking start frequency when a set frequency
lower than the operation start frequency is
specified, DC braking is applied immediately.
z Pressing the stop key again during DC braking
releases the DC braking.
z If an operation signal is input when DC braking is
being applied during a stop operation, operation is
restarted according to the usual operation procedures.
Acceleration/Deceleration Curve
z Linear and S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
frequency curves can be selected.
Frequency
Time
Linear: Cd017 = 1
<Braking>
Operation
command
Braking command
Note: Notes on the use of S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
(1) If the frequency setting is changed during S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration, S-shaped acceleration/
deceleration is started again for the new frequency
setting. Therefore, the change in the actual output
frequency is not a smooth curve, bending at the point
at which the frequency was changed.
(2) When setting the frequency using external analog
signals with Cd002=2 - 12, the analog signals are in
fact constantly changing due to noise and ripple
components. Therefore, in this case also, the change
in the actual output frequency may not be a smooth
curve for the reason described in (1). In this case,
increasing the filter time constant for analog signals
(Cd083) is effective in stabilizing the analog signal
value.
(3) During S-shaped acceleration/deceleration, activating
the frequency lock (simultaneously inputting a forward
run signal and a reverse run signal under external
terminal operation) stops any acceleration or deceleration and fixes the output frequency value. When the
frequency lock is released, the remainder of the
frequency change is applied by starting S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration again.
Example) Frequency lock at 20 Hz during acceleration from 10 Hz to 50 Hz
During the frequency lock, the inverter operates at a
fixed frequency of 20 Hz. When the lock is released,
acceleration begins again from 20 Hz to 50 Hz.
(4) Changing the acceleration/deceleration time (Cd018Cd026) during S-shaped acceleration/deceleration has
no effect until the next acceleration/deceleration.
Similarly, switching to another acceleration/deceleration pattern (such as the 2nd acceleration/deceleration) using an external control terminal during acceleration/deceleration has no effect until the next
acceleration/deceleration.
(5) When the current limiting function is applied during Sshaped acceleration/deceleration, a linear acceleration/deceleration is used for the remainder of that
acceleration/deceleration.
(6) Acceleration/deceleration when the current limiting
function is used during constant power operation is
<Start-up>
DC braking
start frequency
Braking
magnitude
Braking time
Time
S-shaped: Cd017 = 2
z The S-shaped acceleration/deceleration curve is
effective in reducing shock when starting and stopping.
The shape of the S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
curve can be changed using Cd090 - 095.
Note 1: Cd015 and Cd016 are only effective in the V/f mode
(Cd071=1, 3, 4, 6, 7 and 11). In the Sensorless
Vector Control Mode (Cd071=2, 5, 8, 9, 10 and 12),
the settings of Cd074 - 077 correspond to the
settings of Cd015 and Cd016.
Note 2: During DC braking, the motor may overheat because
the self cooling effect of the motor's own rotation is
ineffective. Therefore, it is recommended to set the
DC braking force at a relatively low level to prevent
the motor from overheating, or to attach a thermal
relay to the motor.
Note 3: If increasing the DC braking force is not effective, it
is assumed that a fault has occurred and the
resulting overcurrent has actuated the current
limiting function.
Output
frequency
Frequency
Braking
magnitude
Braking time
- 65 -
(8)
Output frequency
Set frequency
Operation
signal
(operation
panel or
external signal)
Time
Input signals
(7)
conducted with the acceleration/deceleration mode
specified by Cd017.
“Forward and reverse run” (A function to temporarily
disconnect the operation signal during forward run or
reverse run in order to apply an operation signal for
the opposite direction of rotation again before the
motor stops. Only effective when Cd001=2):
In the Sensorless Vector Control Mode (Cd071=2),
“forward and reverse run” uses S-shaped acceleration/deceleration based on a reference frequency of
0Hz.
Acceleration/deceleration during the JOG operation
Short-circuit
between AD2
and DCM1/2/3
Short-circuit
between AD3
and DCM1/2/3
1st 2nd 3rd
4th
acceleration time
also uses S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
1st 2nd 3rd
4th
deceleration time
JOG Frequency
z The frequency during the jog operation can be
specified using this function.
z Selection of the jog operation mode (control input
terminals JOG-DCM1, JOG-DCM2 or JOG-DCM3 are
shorted) allows the JOG frequency to be specified
directly or in steps from the operation panel.
Cd028=0.1 - 60Hz (in 0.01Hz steps)
Reference Acceleration/
Deceleration Frequency
1st Acceleration Time
2nd Acceleration Time
3rd Acceleration Time
4th Acceleration Time
1st Deceleration Time
Note: As long as the jog operation mode is selected, this
mode takes precedence and cannot be changed to
any other multi-speed frequency.
2nd Deceleration Time
3rd Deceleration Time
4th Deceleration Time
1st Speed Frequency
JOG Acceleration/
Deceleration Time
2nd Speed Frequency
z The acceleration/deceleration curve when the output
frequency changes from the current value to a newly
specified value is determined by specifying the
acceleration time, deceleration time and the reference
acceleration/deceleration frequency.
z Four different acceleration times and deceleration
times can be selected to independently specify four
different acceleration curves and deceleration curves.
Cd027 specified the acceleration/deceleration curves
during the jog operation.
Cd018=10 - 120Hz (in 0.01Hz steps)
Cd019 - 026=0 - 6500 sec. (in 0.1 sec. steps)
Cd027=0 - 20 sec. (in 0.1 sec. steps)
Example 1: When Cd018=50Hz and Cd019=5 sec.,
10Hz/sec. is selected for the acceleration
curve.
z Even if the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 0
sec. in the V/f mode, the actual value is 0.1 sec.
z The 2nd thru 4th acceleration/deceleration times are
selected by the combination of signals input to control
input terminals AD2 and AD3.
3rd Speed Frequency
4th Speed Frequency
5th Speed Frequency
6th Speed Frequency
7th Speed Frequency
8th Speed Frequency
z This is function used to set frequencies during multistep speed operation.
Cd029 - 036= 0 - 600Hz (in 0.01Hz step)
z Multi-speed operation frequencies can be set for any
one of the 1st through 8th speeds by a combination of
three signals input to terminals 2DF, 3DF and 5DF.
The inverter operates according to the multi-speed
setting.
z During multi-speed operation, a new frequency can be
set directly or in steps from the operation panel.
Example 1: Frequency setting using the operation
panel when the 3rd frequency is selected:
The new frequency specified directly or in
steps from the operation panel is stored in
Cd031.
Example 2: Speed is switched over to 5th speed while
changing the set frequency during
operation at the 3rd speed:
- 66 -
z It is impossible to set the top value lower than the
bottom value of the jump frequency. Therefore, when
setting the top value or the bottom value, set the
values in the correct order so that the top and bottom
values are not reversed. (Because in the initial
settings both the top and bottom values are specified
as 0, setting the bottom value first causes an error,
prohibiting the setting.)
z When the upper frequency limit (Cd007) or the lower
frequency limit (Cd008) is within the jump frequency
range, the upper frequency limit changes to the
bottom of the jump frequency, and the lower frequency limit changes to the top of the jump frequency.
z Setting a jump frequency range that includes both the
upper frequency limit (Cd007) or highest frequency
and the lower frequency limit (Cd008) is prohibited for
safety reasons.
Output frequency
1) When the drive frequency is being changed in
steps:
The output frequency changes to the 5th speed,
but the step setting procedure continues to
change the specified frequency for the 3rd speed
(Cd031).
2) When the frequency is being changed directly:
Output frequency changes to the 5th speed but
the newly specified frequency is applied to the
3rd frequency speed (Cd031).
8th Speed
7th Speed
6th Speed
5th Speed
4th Speed
3rd Speed
2nd Speed
1st Speed
Time
Operation signal
Between 2DF-DCM1,
2DF-DCM2 or 2DF-DCM3
Between 3DF-DCM1,
3DF-DCM2 or 3DF-DCM3
Between 5DF-DCM1,
5DF-DCM2 or 5DF-DCM3
Settings for Output Current Limiting
Function
1st Jump Bottom Frequency
z The current at which the output current limiting
function begins to work can be specified. This is
useful for driving a motor with a small capacity
compared with that of the inverter, or to make the best
use of the inverter capacity to achieve the speediest
acceleration.
1st Jump Top Frequency
2nd Jump Bottom Frequency
2nd Jump Top Frequency
3rd Jump Bottom Frequency
3rd Jump Top Frequency
Code setting
Description
Cd043=0
No function
Cd043=50 - 200% Sets the ratio of the rated
(H characteristic
current of the motor to
/SHF)
that of the inverter
(in 1% steps).
Square-law
Cd043=0
No function
torque load
Cd043=50 - 150% Sets the ratio of the rated
(P characteristic
current of the motor to
/SPF)
that of the inverter
(in 1% steps).
Constant
torque load
z Mechanical vibration can occur at the resonant
frequency of some mechanical systems, and a beat
derived from the power frequency can cause fluctuations in output voltage. This function is used to skip
frequencies at which mechanical vibration or fluctuations in the output voltage occur.
z Three different frequencies to skip can be specified.
Cd037 - 042=0 - 600Hz (in 0.01Hz steps)
z The frequency jumps between the top and bottom
frequencies specified by Cd037 through Cd042.
No jumps occur during acceleration or deceleration,
however.
Example 1: Cd037=48Hz and Cd038=52Hz
1) If an output frequency of 51Hz is specified, the
inverter continues to operate at 48Hz.
2) When an output frequency of 53Hz is specified,
normal acceleration skips 48-52Hz and reaches
53Hz at which the inverter continues to operate.
Example 2: Cd037=39Hz, Cd038=43Hz, Cd039=41Hz
and Cd040=46Hz
Jump frequencies are combined, and a
width of 39-46Hz is skipped.
z The 1st, 2nd and 3rd jump frequencies can be set
independently, for example, 2nd jump > 1st jump > 3rd
jump frequencies.
z The output current limiting function is used to limit the
inverter’s output current to prevent overload during
acceleration or during constant power operation.
Using this function enables the inverter to temporarily
operate in the ways described below:
1) During acceleration/deceleration: Reduces the
acceleration/deceleration gradient. This extends
the time until the set frequency is reached. The
extended time varies depending on the magnitude
of this setting and the inertia of the load. Generally, accelerating/deceleration a load with a large
inertia requires a considerable current, requiring a
relatively high setting.
Example 1: Cd043=200% (Constant torque load)
Maximum use of the inverter capacity
to minimize the acceleration/deceleration time.
- 67 -
Example 2: Set current limit to the same value as
the rated current of a motor with small
capacity:
Cd043=(rated motor current/rated
inverter current) × 100%. However the
drive frequency can only be specified
within a range of 50 - 200% (for
square-law torque load, 50 - 150%) of
the rated current of the inverter.
2) During constant power operation: When the
inverter’s output current reaches or exceeds this
setting, the output frequency is automatically
reduced. The output frequency is reduced with
the acceleration/deceleration gradient specified
by Cd045.
Even during the acceleration/deceleration caused
by the output current limiting function during the
constant power operation, the output current
limiting function for acceleration/deceleration
described in 1) functions.
specifically for use with an inverter (Refer to Cd052 for
motor types).
z The electrothermal function is valid during DC
braking.
Note: The electrothermal protection functions by monitoring
the output current of the inverter to prevent the motor
from overloading. It can only be used when one
inverter is allocated to each motor. When many small
capacity motors are driven with one inverter, each
motor should be equipped with a thermal relay
connected to the ES control signal terminal (external
thermal function) to protect each motor.
Example 1: To drive a 2.2 kW motor using SBT-3.7K,
set the function code as follows:
Cd044 = (rated current of 2.2 kW motor)/
(rated current of SBT-3.7K: 17.6 A) × 100%
Example 2: When set to Cd044=50%:
50% of the rated inverter current specified
is equivalent to 100% of the load factor of
the electrothermal function. Accordingly,
75% of the rated inverter current is
equivalent to 150% of the load factor of
the electrothermal function.
Note: The current limiting function during constant power
operation is generally useful for loads with a reduced
torque such as fans and pumps. However, this
function has an adverse effect on overloads during
constant power operation with loads with normal and
constant torque.
The factory preset, therefore, of Cd045 (setting to
limit output current during constant power operation)
suspends the output current limiting function during
operation. It is recommended to set Cd045=1 for
loads with a reduced torque (Refer also to Cd003,
Cd060).
100%
Cd044 = 100%
Allowable
continuous
50%
current
Cd044 = 50%
20
40
Output frequency
When
Cd044 = 100%
3
z The torque limiter functions in sensorless vector
control mode obviate the need for the output current
limiting function.
Working
duration
(min.)
60Hz
60Hz
2
10Hz
* Example of P mode
1
Electrothermal Level Setting
100
z The current at which the electrothermal protection
begins to function (electrothermal level setting) is
specified as a percentage relative to the rated inverter
current.
Cd044=0: No electrothermal function. However,
the thermal protection function prevents
overheating of the inverter. This code is
useful to drive multiple small motors
using one inverter.
Cd044=20 - 105% (in 1% step)
z When a motor with a small capacity is driven, Cd044
should be set to a small value (as above mentioned).
z For general-purpose motors, the function is usually
set to operate earlier due to low cooling efficiency of
the motor in the low speed range. Such current
correction is not provided for motors designed
120
Load factor [%]
200
Output Current Limiting During Constant
Power Operation
z Whether the inverter output limiting function (Cd043)
operates can be specified using this function code.
z The motor control mode and the acceleration/deceleration time can be specified. The acceleration/deceleration time can be operated at the time specified with
Cd019-Cd026. (The external signal input is not
required.)
z For related functions, refer to Cd043 (Settings for
Output Current Limiting Function).
Cd045=0: No protective function
Cd045=1: Use protective function V/F mode only
(Currently selected acceleration/
deceleration time)
- 68 -
Cd045=2:
Cd045=3:
Cd045=4:
Cd045=5:
Cd045=6:
Cd045=7:
Cd045=8:
Cd045=9:
Use protective function V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd019,
Cd023: 1st acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd020,
Cd024: 2nd acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd021,
Cd025: 3rd acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode only
(Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd022,
Cd026: 4th acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode and
sensorless vector control mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd019,
Cd023: 1st acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode and
sensorless vector control mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd020,
Cd024: 2nd acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode and
sensorless vector control mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd021,
Cd025: 3rd acceleration/deceleration
time)
Use protective function V/F mode and
sensorless vector control mode (Acceleration/Deceleration time = Cd022,
Cd026: 4th acceleration/deceleration
time)
Restart After Momentary Power Failure
z Whether the inverter resumes operation after it stops
due to a momentary power failure can be specified
using this function code. This function works
properly only after a momentary power failure. If the
duration of the power failure is longer, the control
signal is lost, and the status is as shown in the
following table.
Momentary power failure
Operation
panel
Operation
signal
0: No restart
No
operation
signal
External control signals
Operation
panel
Operation
signal
No
operation
signal
No restart
No restart
No restart
No restart
No restart
Restart
1: Restart
Restart
Restart
No restart
No restart
Restart
No restart
2. Restart
Restart
Restart
No restart
No restart
Restart
No restart
z When “Cd046=2” (Restart) is selected, the Momentary
Power Failure Compensation function is enabled to
prolong the operation time of the inverter even in the
event of a power failure.
The Momentary Power Failure Compensation function
detects a drop in the input voltage, and reduces the
output frequency and voltage of the inverter before
any alarms are tripped, and uses the regeneration
energy from the motor to keep it operating for longer.
Note 1: While the Momentary Power Failure Compensation
function is working, the output frequency of the
inverter is reduced. Do not use the Momentary
Power Failure Compensation function for loads for
which a frequency reduction is not acceptable.
Note 2: When “Cd046=2” is selected, restart after a
momentary power failure is the same as “Cd046=1.”
Auto Alarm Recovery
z This function code specifies whether the inverter
automatically restarts after the protective function of
the inverter is tripped due to overcurrent or overvoltage.
Cd047=0: No auto alarm recovery function
Cd047=1: Auto alarm recovery function
z The inverter restarts in the flying start mode. The
alarm relay does not activate when the inverter is
restarted.
z If three consecutive trips occur in 10 seconds, the
alarm relay activates.
z When an alarm for which auto recovery is possible
occurs during standby and then is released, the
recovery method depends on the status at that time.
Standby: Continues in standby.
Conditions for operation are established: Starting
frequency is invalid because flying start is
used.
Output voltage
Output frequency
The acceleration/deceleration
gradient is specified by Cd045.
Cd046
Note: The inverter starts in the flying start mode after a
momentary power failure (or voltage drop).
Note: Output current limiting during constant power
operation uses the same function code for 2nd - 4th
acceleration/deceleration time.
Output current
limiting value
(Cd043)
Long power failure
External control signals
Use output current
limiting during constant
operation. (Cd045≠0)
Time →
- 69 -
z When an alarm for which auto recovery is possible
occurs during deceleration due to the stop signal and
then is released, auto recovery is performed in the
alarm stop status, but operation is not restarted.
z Auto recovery is possible with the following alarms:
Direction of Rotation of Motor
z This function is useful to restrict the rotation of the
motor to a fixed direction for safety reasons etc.
Cd050=1: Forward and reverse
Cd050=2: Forward only
Cd050=3: Reverse only
: Main switching device temperature abnormality
: Overcurrent during acceleration
: Overcurrent during constant power operation
: Overcurrent during deceleration
: Overvoltage during acceleration
: Overvoltage during constant power operation
: Overvoltage during deceleration
: Brake resistor protection overvoltage
Note 1: The direction of rotation of the motor that is actually
“forward” or “reverse” depends on the construction
of the motor and wiring between the inverter and
the motor. Confirm which direction the motor
actually runs when the “forward” or “reverse” run
command is given to the inverter during a test run.
Note 2: When the
Overload Alarm Level Setting
z This function code specifies the level of current at
which an overload alarm is output to the control signal
output terminal (can be set using Cd638-Cd640) before
the inverter stops or the motor load is damaged.
Constant
torque load
Code setting
Cd048=
20 - 200%
(H characteristic
/SHF)
Square-reduced Cd048=
torque load
20 - 150%
(P characteristic
/SPF)
key on the operation panel is
pressed, the motor starts rotating in the direction
set by Cd130.
Carrier Frequency
z This function sets the carrier frequency of the inverter.
As the value of the Cd051 code increases, the carrier
frequency goes higher. The maximum carrier frequency automatically varies according to the operating status and motor capacity.
Cd051=0 - 130
Description
Sets the ratio of the rated
current of the motor to
that of the inverter
(in 1% steps).
Sets the ratio of the rated
current of the motor to
that of the inverter
(in 1% steps).
Note 1: When the carrier frequency is low, the carrier noise
on the inverter increases, but the leak current
flowing to earth decreases.
Note 2: Raise the carrier frequency to set the inverter
output frequency high.
z For related functions, refer to 4.2(6) multifunctional
output terminals.
Cd638-Cd640=8: Output only in constant operation.
Cd638-Cd640=34: Output when in operation.
Motor Types
z The type of motor connected to the inverter is
specified using this function code.
Cd052=1: General-purpose motor
Cd052=2: Motor designed specifically for inverter
or variable speed motor
z For details of related functions, refer to Cd044 (electrothermal level setting).
Duty Cycle of Brake Resistor
z This function code specifies the duty cycle of the
brake resistor. A setting within the allowable duty
cycle should be selected.
Cd049=0: No brake resistor provided
Cd049=2 - 25% ED (in steps of 1%ED)
Cd049=99: External brake unit in use
z With Cd049=2 - 25, when it is judged that overcurrent
has been flowing to the brake resistance for a long
time, the function of the brake transistor is stopped
temporarily to prevent the brake resistor from burning
out.
Poles, Voltage and Capacity of Motor
z The number of poles, voltage and capacity of the
motor connected to the inverter are specified using
this function code.
Cd053= X Y ZZZ
X: Number of poles
Y: Rated voltage
Z: Motor capacity
z Specify an appropriate value for each position using
Note 1: Set Cd049=99 for braking using an external circuit.
Note 2: Set %Ed only for models that build in a brake resistor.
the operation panel keys
- 70 -
,
and
.
z Acceptable settings and the corresponding display
values are shown below.
1) Input one of four even numbers from 2 to 8 for
the number of poles.
2
2)
4
6
Bias Frequency (VRF1)
Gain Frequency (VRF1)
Bias Frequency (IRF/VRF2)
Gain Frequency (IRF/VRF2)
8
z This function sets a frequency (bias frequency)
corresponding to the minimum analog setting signal
(0V or 4mA), and a frequency (gain frequency)
corresponding to the maximum (5V or 10V and 20mA),
used when the output frequency is controlled by
analog signals.
Cd054, Cd062=0 to ±600Hz (in 0.1Hz step)
Cd055, Cd063=0 to ±600Hz (in 0.1Hz step)
“P×××” is displayed for plus, and “–×××”, for
minus.
Adjust input from the VRF1 terminal using Cd054 or
Cd055.
Adjust input from the IRF/VRF2 terminal using Cd062
or Cd063.
Input one of the following designation numbers
for the rated voltage.
Designation No.
Corresponding
voltage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
200 220 230 380 400 415 440 460
(in [V])
3)
Motor capacity: Motor capacity settings are
listed below.
0.37
∆0.4
0.55
0.75
∆1.1
∆1.5
∆2.2
∆3.0
18.5
90.0
280
∆3.7
22.0
110
315
∆4.0
30.0
132
∆5.5
37.0
160
∆7.5
45.0
200
11.0
55.0
220
15.0
75.0
250
[∆ indicates a space]
(in [kW])
Gain frequency
Output
frequency
Example: Indication on the 7-segment display for a
220V, 2.2kW motor with four poles:
0V or 4mA
0Hz
Bias frequency
Example of key operation:
To change the rated voltage of the 220V,
2.2kW motor with four poles to 200V:
5V
or 10V
or 20mA
Analog
frequency
setting signal
Setting example: Cd054=-10Hz, Cd055=90Hz, Cd002=3
1V or less
1V
10V
Output
frequency
90Hz
or
Note: In the V/f mode (Cd071=1), the value for the number
of poles is indicated in place of the rotation speed.
In the sensorless vector control mode (Cd071=2), the
settings of the above function code (Cd053) provide
the basis on which different parameters for controlling the inverter are determined. The above settings,
therefore, must be specified properly for operation in
the sensorless vector control mode. The settings
shown below should generally be specified for the
sensorless vector control mode. If motors with other
specifications are planned to be used in the
sensorless vector control mode, contact the supplier
for details of how to set these values and other data.
Number of poles: 4 or 6
Rated voltage:
3 or less for a 200V type
inverter
4 or more for a 400V type
inverter
Motor capacity: If the motor does not have a
capacity equal to or one level
lower than the inverter,
may be displayed.
A method for
diminishing the effect
of noise by not
inputting a voltage
less than 1V
0Hz
-10Hz
0Hz
0Hz
90Hz
1V
Analog frequency
setting signal
10V
z By taking advantage of bias and gain frequencies, a
common analog signal for frequency commands can
be input to more than one inverter for proportional
operation.
Example: Input 0 - 10V analog signals to two inverters, so that 1st and 2nd inverters deliver
output frequencies with a ratio of 1:2 for the
purpose of proportional operation.
Setting for the 1st inverter: Cd054=0Hz,
Cd055=50Hz
Setting for the 2nd inverter: Cd054=0Hz,
Cd055=100Hz
(The acceleration time should be adjusted
as necessary.)
- 71 -
Note 1: In negative setting frequency range, the output
frequency is 0Hz.
Note 2: For PID control with “Cd071=3,” the bias and gain
frequencies apply to the feedback signal.
z In No-Units Display mode, the display on the 7segment display can be changed with the step keys
only when “No Units (Cd059=1)” is selected. If the
value is changed using the step keys, the preset
frequency also changes. The numeric keys cannot be
used to change the display value on the 7-segment
display.
z If a function code other than “No Units (Cd059=1)” is
selected, the display on the 7-segment display cannot
be changed using the step or numeric keys.
Approach Frequency
z This function specifies the frequency at which a
frequency approach signal is output.
Cd056=0 - 600Hz (in 0.01Hz steps)
z If the value of any of Cd638 to 640 is 7, the signal is
output to terminals DO1 to DO3 when the output
frequency exceeds the setting of Cd056.
Rating Selection
z This function is used to switch ratings to the H
(constant torque load) or P characteristic (squarereduced torque load).
Cd060=1: H characteristic (constant torque load)
Cd060=2: P characteristic (square-reduced torque
load)
z If ratings are switched, the initial values of the
selected ratings are used as the values of function
codes whose ranges or initial values depend on the
ratings.
Frequency Matching Range
z This function specifies the frequency range in which
the frequency matching signal is output.
Cd057=0 - 10Hz (in 0.01Hz steps)
z If the value of any of Cd638 to 640 is 5, 6, 14 or 15, the
frequency matching signal is output to terminals DO1
to DO3 when the output frequency is within the range
specified by Cd057.
Note: When the frequency is specified using an analog
signal, an appropriate setting should be specified
using Cd057 to prevent chattering. When the
sensorless vector control or PG option is active, the
output frequency constantly fluctuates. Set Cd057 to
several Hz.
Note: This function is valid for SBT series (SBT-22K/30K or
less) only.
Instability Elimination
z When the inverter is used to drive a motor, the dead
time to protect a switching device from a short circuit
may make the current unstable. If the current becomes
unstable, the motor may generate vibration or abnormal noises. In addition, the current value may become
greater than when the current is stable. The instability
elimination function is used to avoid this problem.
Cd061=0 to 20 (in step of 1)
The larger the value specified, the
greater the compensation. Therefore,
increase the value gradually to find the
value at which instability is eliminated.
Multiple for No-Units Display
z This function is used in the No-Units mode of the 7segment display on the operation panel. It sets the
multiple for the output frequency when Cd059=1 (Nounits display)
Cd058=0.01 - 100 (in 0.01 step)
z This function is useful for indicating values such as
the line speed.
Display Selection
z This function is used to select output data displayed
on the 7-segment display on the operation panel in
No-Units Display mode.
Cd059=1: No units (multiple of Cd058)
Cd059=2: PID feedback frequency [Hz]
Cd059=3: Command pressure [MPa] (option)
Cd059=4: Set pressure [MPa] (option)
Cd059=5: Command frequency [Hz]
Cd059=6: Fin temperature [°C]
Cd059=7: Detecting speed [rpm] (option)
Cd059=8: Regular pump switching integrated time
[H] (option)
Cd059=9-10: Reserved
Cd059=11: Detecting position [mm] (option)
Cd059=12: DC voltage [V]
Discharge Resistor on Signal Output Time
z This function is used to output signals from a multifunctional output terminal for the time set with Cd064
when the internal discharge resistor for regenerated
power discharge is turned on.
Cd064=0.01 - 10 s
z Set Cd638, Cd389, or Cd640 to “30” for the multifunctional output terminal setting. The discharge resistor
on signal is output from the terminal which is set to
“30”.
- 72 -
z During regenerated energy discharge, the discharge
resistor switches on and off very quickly. The
Discharge Resistor on Signal function facilitates the
measurement of this high-speed on/off operation with
a narrow pulse width by means of external equipment.
The narrow pulse width of the on/off operation is
expanded by the time set with Cd064 and output to a
multifunctional output terminal.
Example: When the Discharge Resistor on Signal
Output Time Cd064=0.1 s.
V f separate function selection
z This function specifies the operation of Cd071=11 V·f
separate control.
Cd066=1: V·f comparison
Cd066=2: Complete separation
MBS Terminal Input Mode
z This function is used to select the operation of the
MBS input signal input to the multifunctional input
terminal.
Cd067=1: Level operation
Cd067=2: Edge operation
Edge operation will accept MBS input
once between OFF and ON.
off
Discharge resistor
on/off signal
Multifunctional
output on/off signal
on
off
on
100ms
Cd064
100ms
Cd064
Set Frequency Gain Function
Internal analog output bias 1
z This function multiplies a set frequency by a gain set
using an external analog input terminal.
Cd065=0-100% (in step of 1%)
z When several inverters are used for proportional
operation, this function is useful for adjusting the
command frequencies of the inverters from the master
to the slave precisely.
z The external analog input terminal is selected with
Cd120 “Analog Input Switching.”
z The value set by Cd065 is multiplied by the given gain
and added to or subtracted from the set frequency.
Example: When the set frequency is 50 Hz, Cd065 is
50%, and the external analog input is 0 to
10V.
Internal analog output bias 2
z This function specifies the bias to the analog output
specified by the internal analog output function 1 and
internal analog output function 2.
Cd068, Cd069=0 - ±10.0 V (0.1 step)
The following is displayed:
Plus: Pxx.x
Minus: -xx.x
Cd068:
The bias for Cd126 internal analog
output function 1.
Cd069:
The bias for Cd128 internal analog
output function 2.
Example: When internal analog output is set
frequency, set frequency is output at 120
Hz 10 V.
+100%
75Hz
0%
Cd065
10V
50Hz
25Hz
7.5V
-Cd065
5V
-100%
0V or 4mA
10V
5V or 2.5V
or 12mA
5V
10V or 5V
or 20mA
VRF1 or IRF/VRF2 input
• 0 V: 50 Hz - (50 Hz × 50%) = 25 Hz
• 5 V: 50 Hz - (50 Hz × 0%) = 50 Hz
• 10 V: 50 Hz + (50 Hz × 50%) = 75 Hz
0
60Hz
120Hz
a) Bias = 0 V
0
60Hz
120Hz
b) Bias = 5 V
Note 1: When the analog output is in negative range by the
bias, the output is 0 V.
Note 2: The analog output cannot be set higher than 10 V
even if the bias setting is high.
Note: Since Cd120 is used, this function cannot be used
together with the PID, energy saving, or disturbed
operation functions that share the same function
code Cd120. This function works when Cd065 is set
to a value other than 0. To allow another function to
use Cd120, set Cd065=0.
ES Input Terminal
z The control input terminal ES can be switched
between the following.
Cd070=1: ES terminal (external thermal signal input
terminal) is connected with an NO
(normally open) contact.
- 73 -
Cd070=2:
(1)
(2)
One motor for one inverter.
The motor must be a Sanken designated 4-pole or
6-pole 3-phase conducting motor or a similar motor.
(3) The motor drive capacity must be equal to that of
the standard motor suitable for the inverter rating or
one rank below.
(4) The wiring length between the inverter and the
motor shall be less than 30 m.
If the wiring length exceeds 30 m, conduct auto
tuning of the motor constant in advance using the
auto tuning mode.
Note 2: Settings not failing under (2) and (3) in Note 1
cannot be specified for Cd053. Set the mode
correctly in accordance with the above. When the
setting of Cd053 and the connected motor rating do
not match, the function and the control characteristic of the inverter cannot be guaranteed.
Note 3: When the sensorless vector control mode is
specified, the following function codes are
restricted:
Cd004 - Cd008:
Settings are invalid.
Cd009=1, 3:
Settings are invalid.
Starting excitation is performed according to the
setting of starting excitation time (Cd075), and
operation starts from 1 Hz. However, the
settings of the operation start frequency
(Cd011) and the start delay time (Cd012) take
precedence.
Cd010:
Settings are invalid.
Cd013=1, 2:
Deceleration is carried out according to the
setting of the gradient of deceleration due to a
stop signal. When the output frequency
reaches either the DC braking start frequency
(Cd014) or the operation start frequency
(Cd011), whichever is lower, braking excitation
depending on the braking excitation time setting
(Cd077) stops the inverter. The relationship
between the output frequency and the settings
of Cd011 and Cd014 is controlled similar way to
the V/f mode.
Cd015, 016:
The function on DC braking changes to Cd074 077.
Cd043, 045:
The function on current limiting changes to
Cd072, 073.
Note 4: Other notes
(1) With the motor's rated speed of rotation as the
synchronous speed, specify the frequency
determined by the motor's poles and synchronous
speed as the maximum value of the set frequency.
Driving the motor with a frequency setting over this
value causes the motor to overheat.
(2) In constant power operation, because the motor's
speed of rotation is controlled to keep it constant,
the frequency that the inverter actually outputs
constantly varies. In contrast to the case of the V/f
ES terminal (external thermal signal input
terminal) is connected with an NC
(normally closed) contact.
Motor Control Mode Selection
z Function to select a motor control mode.
Cd071=1: V/f mode
Cd071=2: Sensorless vector control mode
Cd071=3: Internal PID control mode (V/f mode
base)
Cd071=4: Position control (option)
Cd071=5: Speed control (option)
Cd071=6: Simple energy-saving control mode (V/f
mode base)
Cd071=7: Auto energy-saving control mode 1 (V/f
mode base)
Cd071=8: Auto energy-saving control mode 2
(sensorless vector control mode base)
Cd071=9: Auto tuning mode 1
Cd071=10: Auto tuning mode 2
Cd071=11: Vf separate control
Cd071=12: Switching between sensorless vector
control and V/f control
z The V/f mode controls the motor with a specified V/f
pattern.
z Sensorless vector control mode
• The sensorless vector control mode is used for
automatic constant speed control during constant
power operation, irrespective of the load status. At
the same time, this control mode is able to generate
a high torque in a low-frequency range to the motor.
• In the sensorless vector control mode, because the
motor constant is used to control frequency and
voltage and drive the motor, the control characteristic depends on the motor constant. For that reason,
some motors may not deliver their best performance.
When the motor characteristics cannot be determined, it is recommended to carry out auto tuning of
the motor constant with the auto tuning mode in
advance or to use the V/f mode, which does not
depend on the motor constant.
• When external terminal board operation (Cd001=2) is
specified, “forward/reverse run” can be conducted.
When the operation is signal is temporarily cut off
during forward or reverse operation but before the
inverter stops, the opposite signal is input, then the
inverter decelerates, and begins to accelerate again
at 0 Hz. This allows an uninterrupted transition from
forward to reverse rotation.
Note 1: When specifying the sensorless vector control
mode, it is necessary to meet the following
conditions.
- 74 -
(3)
(4)
(5)
mode, the set frequency and the output frequency
do not necessarily coincide in constant power
operation. Therefore, the output frequency may
exceed the set frequency.
“Frequency approach” and “frequency matching”
specified by Cd638, 639 and 640 determine when
the output frequency reaches or matches the set
frequency. Therefore, for the “frequency matching”
function, set the frequency matching range (Cd057)
to a few Hz because of the phenomenon described
in (2).
All values output to the operation panel's 7-segment
display are based on the command frequency. In
the case of the frequency display mode, the
command frequency is displayed. In the case of
the rotation and no-units display mode, the
command frequency multiplied by a designated
value is displayed.
It is possible to set a frequency lower than 1Hz, but
IRF/VRF2 terminal:
Inputs a feedback signal in the form of a
current signal (4mA to 20mA (specified
by “Cd120=5”)).
VRF1 terminal:
Inputs a set frequency in the form of a
voltage signal (0V to 10V (specified by
“Cd002=3”)) as a feedback signal.
The set frequency and the feedback signal can
be combined in different ways as long as the
VRF1 analog input (voltage input) and the IRF
analog input (current input) of the inverter do
not conflict. (Only positive analog values can
be entered.)
Set frequency → Cd002 (Inputs a set value
in the specified mode.)
Feedback signal → Cd120 (Inputs a signal
to the VRF1 or IRF/VRF2 terminal.)
the inverter operates at 1Hz.
z Cd071=3 internal PID control mode
• This function uses an analog signal (4mA to 20mA,
0V to 5V, 0V to 10V) from the external converter as a
feedback signal to the inverter, compares it with the
set frequency of the inverter to obtain the deviation,
and P (proportional), I (integral), or D (differential)
control is used to control the operation of the load
to keep it to the specified value.
• This function is valid in the V/f mode. Therefore, if
the speed of rotation of the load is expected to drop
due to fluctuation in the load, this function uses an
analog feedback signal (e.g. from a speed sensor) to
perform PID control in a closed loop. Thus the
steady operation of the motor (load) is assured
despite fluctuations in the load.
1) Related function codes and control terminals of
the inverter
Inverter
DeviaAcceleration/
Deceleration
gradient
+ tion
-
PID control
IM
Command
frequency
Set value
VRF1
IRF/VRF2
F
P
Output
frequency
Filter
Control data
(Pressure, flow
rate, etc.)
ACM
0 - 10V
Frequency
setter
Converter
4 - 20mA
Figure 7.1
3) Filter function
• When the feedback signal is likely to contain
noise, adjust the time constant of the feedback
input filter (Cd125). “F” in Figure 7.1 indicates
a filter.
• The time constant (Cd125) is represented in
the format “N × 10msec” (N = 1 to 500). (The
time constant is in the range 10msec to
5000msec.) When “Cd125=1” is set, the filter
function is invalidated as the sampling cycle is
10msec.
Control terminal of
the inverter
Cd071=3
Internal PID
VRF1 Voltage Feedback
Control Mode
Input
Cd120=
Analog Input
VRF2 Voltage Feedback
1-5
Switching
Input
Cd122=
PID Control
IRF
Current Feedback
0.00 - 100.00 Proportional Gain
Input
Cd123=
PID Control
ACM Analog Signal
0.00 - 100.00 Integral Gain
Common Terminal
Cd124=
PID Control
0.00 - 100.00 Differential Gain
Cd125=
Feedback Input
1 - 500
Filter Time
Constant
Function code
Note: A greater filter time constant may delay the
control response and reduce the controllability.
4) Entering a set value (converting the feedback to
a frequency)
• The set value is entered in the form of a
frequency from the operation panel or the
external analog input. Figure 7.2 shows how a
set value (frequency) is determined for the
pressure converter in Figure 7.1.
(1) Read the Y-axis value (Is) of a point on
the P-I line at which the vertical line
passing through X = Pset intersects.
2) Example of using the function
• Figure 7.1 shows a basic example of using the
PID control function. (This example assumes
both command and feedback signals are
analog signals.)
- 75 -
Note 1: If only the P gain is set (without the I gain),
a steady deviation is output.
Note 2: An excessive D gain will make the output
frequency change rapidly. Use it only if
required.
(2) Read the X-axis value (Fset) of a point
on the F-I line at which the horizontal
line passing through Y = Is intersects.
The Fset value is the set frequency.
(3) Enter this frequency value from the
operation panel or the external analog
input.
The F-I characteristic line is the gain
frequency set by “Cd055” at 20mA, 5V,
and 10V (the maximum feedback input set
by “Cd120”).
6) Example of PID control
• An actual PID control example is shown in
Figure 7.4. When the Inverter ON command is
entered and acceleration starts, the inverter
starts PID control. The command frequency is
accelerated to the set frequency gradually in
the currently applicable acceleration time. The
PID operation uses the deviation between the
command frequency and the feedback
frequency to change the output frequency so
as to make the feedback value follow the
command value. This PID control is performed
also in the constant power operation and
during deceleration.
Note 1: Set the gain of the feedback input in the
form of a frequency for the maximum
analog input value with “Cd055” or
“Cd063”.
Note 2: When the starting frequency is greater
than the feedback input frequency, the
command frequency is increased from
the feedback input frequency.
20mA
RUN command
P-I line
Control
signal
current
STOP command
F-I line
Is
I
4mA
0
Frequency equivalent to
the feedback amount
Command frequency
Pmax.
Pset
Pressure P
Frequency F
Fmax.
Fset
Figure 7.2
5) Setting a PID gain
• Adjust the PID gain by referring to the block
diagram in Figure 7.3.
The sampling cycle (software processing
cycle) for PID control is 10msec.
Deviation
Fe
-
1
I
+
sTs
+
Output
frequency
Fo
+
sTsD
Filter
1+sTf
Fi
G(s) =
Feedback value
P:
I:
D:
Ts:
Tf:
S:
PID control range
Figure 7.4
P
Command
+
value
Command frequency
F0
I
= P + + sTsD
Fe
sTs
Proportional gain (Cd122)
Integral gain (Cd123)
Differential gain (Cd124)
Sampling cycle=10ms
Filter time constant (Cd125)
Laplacean operator
Figure 7.3
- 76 -
7) Recommended code settings
For analog specifications
Recommended setting values for acceleration/deceleration time
Load required for transient response: 1/5 or less than the factory
preset.
(machine tools, elevators)
Slow load response: Must be equal to or less than the factory
preset. Power of 22kW (fan, pump) or greater must not exceed 30
sec.
[Acceleration/deceleration time setting value when Cd018 is 50Hz
(default)]
Frequency
Step1
H
Range of target setting values
A
MPa
rpm
to
MPa
rpm
B
0
Vin
(V)
A: Minimum target setting value
B: Maximum target setting value
Check: Is the ratio of A to B 1:200 or less?
5(V)
Vin
Cd054
Cd055
Frequency
C
V
A
to
V
A
D
C: Detection value when feedback value is A
D: Detection value when feedback value is B
Check: Are C and D 0V to 5V (0V to 10V or
4mA to 20mA)?
Cd054
Cd055
H
Feedback level to target setting value
PID
Control
Limiter
Cd122 - 124
Cd007,008
Fout
F
Yes
Step2
+
F*
Acceleration/
deceleration
conversion
Frequency
conversion
Frequency
conversion
Code setting
0
Voltage feedback:
Cd120 = 1 or 3 if D<5V
Cd120 = 2 or 4 if D≥5V
Current feedback:
Cd120 = 3
5
Vfb
Filter
Cd125
Feedback
signal
Yes
Step3
Figure 7.5
Feedback gain
E
MPa
rpm
to
MPa
rpm
F
E: Control amount during 0V (4mA) feedback
F: Control amount during 5V (10V or 20mA)
feedback
Relationship between
control amount and
FB value
Can also be calculated
from:
Y(V) = (C-D)/(A-B) ×
X(MPa) + (AD-BC)/(A-B)
<Ripple>
Feedback value
Step4
(Load) Motor drive frequency
Command value
Code setting
G
to
Hz
H
Hz
G: Minimum drive frequency
H: Maximum drive frequency
Check: Are G and H within 0.05Hz to 600Hz?
Set:
Cd008 (Lower frequency
limit) = G
Cd007 (Upper frequency
limit) = H
Yes
Step5
time
Bias and gain frequency setting
I
Hz
J
Hz
=
=
Code setting
0(zero)
Frequency conversion
value of the sensor max.
Set:
Cd054 (bias) = I
Cd055 (gain) = J
Figure 7.6
I: Bias frequency
J: Gain frequency
<Ripple>
Step6
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Set in accordance with the recommended
values in Figure 7.5.
Fan, pump: Must be equal to or less than the
factory preset. Power of 22kW or greater must
not exceed 30 sec.
Code setting
Feedback value
Set Cd019 and Cd023
Example: SBT 1.5kW → Cd019, 023 = 5 sec. or less
Note: Acceleration operation using PID control
differs from regular operation because the
acceleration/deceleration gradient of the
command value is not consistent with the
acceleration/deceleration gradient of the
output frequency. Set the acceleration/
deceleration time lower than the factory preset
in order to be able to suitably adjust PID gain.
Command value
Step7
PI gain adjustment
1. Test operation is performed with the default settings.
Are characteristics satisfied?
Yes
No
Slow response
Acceleration/deceleration is slow:
Increase gain (double).
Load response is slow during
constant power operation:
Increase P gain (double).
There is a ripple:
Lower P gain or
increase filter time
constant (Cd125)
(double).
Refer to Figure 7.6
Resonance occurs
Increase P gain
(double) or lower I
gain (by 1/2).
time
Overcurrent occurs
during acceleration
Lower I gain
(by 1/2).
Figure 7.7
Refer to Figure 7.7
Adjustment
completed
Note: Please contact a sales office if each step results in a “No.”
- 77 -
stop. Be careful when changing the upper
8) PID control switching signal
• PID control can be enabled or disabled using
an external signal (PID) if one of the function
codes Cd630 to Cd637 for multifunctional
input terminal selection is set to the following:
46: PID control switching signal (PID)
• If multifunctional input terminal PID goes on
when the inverter is not operating, not
feedback PID control but ordinary V/f constant control is activated even though internal
PID control is specified.
• This function is useful when you need to
switch easily between PID control mode and
ordinary operation mode (V/f constant mode).
frequency limit.
z Cd071=6 Simple Energy-Saving function
• This function saves energy by reducing only the
voltage command by a specified amount in the
steady operation a preset time after the acceleration
is completed in the V/f mode.
• Generally, the power to loads (such as fans and
pumps) can be reduced by reducing the output
voltage of the inverter during V/f constant control
(to reduce the current input to the motor). This
function enables manual setting of the voltagefrequency relationship to satisfy the load torque
characteristics.
1) Related function codes
Function code
Cd071=6 Simple Energy-Saving Control Mode
Cd103=0.0 - 6500.0 sec. Operation Timer T1
Cd121=0 - 50% Simple Energy-Saving Rate
2) Operation in the Simple Energy-Saving Control
Mode
• When the RUN command is input to the
inverter, the inverter begins ordinary acceleration until the operation becomes steady.
If the Simple Energy-Saving Control mode
(Cd071=6) is selected, the Simple EnergySaving function starts a specified time
(determined by the operation timer Cd103)
after the operation becomes steady. This
function reduces the output voltage of the
inverter by a rate set by Cd121. For example,
when the output voltage of the inverter
(before the Simple Energy-Saving Control
mode is set) is approx. 200V and the value set
by Cd121 is 50%, this function reduces the
output voltage gradually down to 100V. The
energy-saving rate (Cd121) can also be
changed while the inverter is in operation.
Select a value suitable for the characteristics
of the load.
• Once the Simple Energy-Saving function
starts, this function performs V/f control on
the subsequent output voltage at a preset
voltage reduction rate even when the command frequency is changed. However, when a
STOP command is entered, this function
gradually increases the output voltage
towards the original output voltage. When it
reaches the original output voltage, the
inverter starts deceleration.
Note 1: This switching is valid only when the
inverter is not operating. Inputting the PID
control signal only switches to the V/f
mode when the inverter is stopped.
Note 2: This function is invalid for PID operations in
modes other than the frequency setting
mode. (For example, this function is invalid
when the water supply option is used in
the pressure setting mode.)
9) Notes
• Do not enter a negative feedback value because
the feedback input has no polarity.
• The Jump Frequency functions Cd037 to Cd042 are
disabled.
• The flying start function is available during PID
control.
• The multi-speed function is available during PID
control. (PID control is performed according to the
selected set frequency.)
• The frequency value displayed on the operation
panel during PID control indicates the output
frequency of the inverter.
• Set Cd122 to Cd124 to “0” when either the P, I, or D
operations respectively are not required.
• Connect the feedback signal correctly to the
selected control input terminal (VRF1 or IRF/VRF2)
of the inverter (according to the setting of Cd120).
• When a line break in the feedback system is
detected or no feedback is input during PID control
operation, the inverter alarm-stops with “
”
displayed on the 7-segment display.
• The Output Current Limiting function (Cd043)
accelerates or decelerates the command frequency before PID operation. Therefore, the output
current may not be limited for some PID gain values.
Set the gain values carefully.
• The output frequency is limited between the upper
frequency limit and the lower frequency limit during
steady operation (as in the normal operation).
• When an upper frequency limit (Cd007) below the
output frequency is set during the PID control
operation, the output frequency is immediately
limited to the upper frequency limit. In an extreme
case, a steep deceleration may result in an alarm-
- 78 -
Output voltage and frequency
RUN command
• When the inverter is stopped during Simple EnergySaving, deceleration is carried out after the output
voltage has returned to the original voltage value.
Therefore, the time period between applying the
STOP command and the actual stop of the load
varies according to this time period. Consider this
STOP command
Operation timer T1
(Cd103)
Simple energysaving rate
(Cd121)
Command
frequency
Output voltage in
the ordinary V/f
control
time period when performing sequence control.
Simple energysaving rate
(Cd121)
z Cd071=7 Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 1 (V/f
mode base)
• This energy-saving mode is based on the V/f mode
and saves energy by supplying the most efficient
voltage to the required load torque.
• While the Simple Energy-Saving function requires
manual adjustment of the optimum voltage value,
the Auto Energy-Saving function automatically
calculates the voltage values that are most efficient
for the changing load, and thus provides stable
energy saving.
• To perform energy-saving during motor speed
control or feedback control, provide sensors in the
system and use them together with the PID control
function. (Set Cd120=1 to 5 for details of the PID
control function.)
1) Related function code
Function code
Cd071=7 Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 1
2) Operation in Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode
1
• The Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 1
function is enabled when “Cd071=7” is set.
No adjustment using the other function codes
is required.
• Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 1 starts
after the inverter is started in Auto EnergySaving Control Mode 1 and the operation of
the load becomes steady.
During energy-saving, the function calculates
the output voltage of the inverter for the most
efficient operation of the load and changes the
voltage gradually.
• As this function is always active during
energy saving, the same energy-saving effect
can also be obtained when the torque of the
load is changing gradually. When the set
frequency or the load torque changes rapidly,
the inverter recovers from the energy-saving
operation and makes up for the insufficient
torque.
Output voltage
Simple energy-saving process
3) Output reducing/restoring time
• The Simple Energy-Saving function reduces
the voltage very slowly so as not to apply a
steep torque change to the load (about 10
seconds for the maximum output voltage).
Example 1: When the energy saving control
is used at an energy-saving rate
of 50% while the inverter (having
a maximum output voltage of
440V) is outputting 200V to run
the load, the output voltage is
reduced down to 100V in about
2.3 seconds.
• When the STOP command is entered, the
original output voltage is restored in about 1
second to prevent reduction of the braking
force due to insufficient load torque.
Example 2: In Example 1, the original output
voltage is restored in about 0.23
second after the STOP command
is entered. When it reaches the
original output voltage, the
inverter starts deceleration.
4) Notes:
• The Simple Energy-Saving function reduces only
the output voltage of the inverter for energy saving.
For some kinds of loads, this voltage reduction may
cause a drop in the speed of rotation. Therefore,
to perform energy-saving without reducing the
speed of rotation of the load, it is recommended to
combine the PID control function and Auto EnergySaving Control Mode 1 or 2.
• Do not use this function for loads where energysaving cannot be expected to be achieved by
reducing the output voltage of the inverter.
• When operation is started by the Flying Start
function, the Auto Alarm Recovery function, or the
Restart after Momentary Power Failure function,
the Simple Energy-Saving function is restarted from
the beginning. (The flying-start operation is
enabled.)
- 79 -
RUN command
z Cd071=8 Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2
• This energy-saving mode is based on the
Sensorless Vector Control mode and saves energy
by increasing the motor efficiency for an arbitrary
load torque.
• While the Simple Energy-Saving function requires
manual adjustment of the optimum voltage value,
the Auto Energy-Saving function automatically
reduces the motor loss in the steady status and
performs more efficient operation of a selected load
torque. A stable energy-saving effect is obtained
even when the load changes.
• The Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2 function
is basically the same as the Auto Energy-Saving
Control Mode 1 function except for the control
mode in which it is used (V/f mode or Sensorless
vector control mode). The Auto Energy-Saving
Control Mode 2 function compensates for the
rotation speed of the motor while performing the
energy-saving operation.
1) Related function code
Function code
Cd071=8 Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2
STOP command
Voltage and frequency
Command frequency
Voltage in
ordinary V/f
Voltage
Auto EnergySaving Control
Mode 1 process
Auto EnergySaving Control
Mode 1 process
Time
3) Notes
• This function controls only the output voltage of the
inverter for energy saving. For some kinds of
loads, this voltage reduction may cause a drop in
the speed of rotation. Therefore, to perform
energy-saving without reducing the speed of
rotation of the load, it is recommended to combine
the PID control function and Auto Energy-Saving
Control Mode 1. The PID function is enabled by
setting Cd120 to a value between 1 and 5.
Set Cd120=1 to 5 for the PID control function.
• The time required to reduce or increase the voltage
to the most efficient voltage value depends on the
load status at that time.
• When the set frequency is changed, when the
STOP command is entered, or when the load
changes rapidly, the load torque becomes insufficient and the driving ability reduces. To counter
this, the function restores the output voltage to the
original voltage in a few milliseconds.
• Unlike the Simple Energy-Saving function, the Auto
Energy-Saving function starts to decelerate
immediately when the STOP command is entered.
The time between the input of the STOP command
and the stopping of the load is the same as that for
the ordinary stop operation. When the inverter is
too slow to absorb the regeneration energy, the
protective function works and the time becomes
longer.
• This energy-saving function is effective for light
loads of reduced torque such as fans and pumps,
but may not be effective for heavy loads of
constant torque.
• When operation is started using the Flying Start
function, the Auto Alarm Recovery function, or the
Restart after Momentary Power Failure function,
the Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 1 function is
restarted from the beginning. (The flying-start
operation is enabled.)
• The energy-saving operation is carried out while
the load torque is constant and steady (in the
frequency matching status). Therefore, when the
set frequency changes (e.g. by input of an analog
frequency), a greater frequency matching range
(Cd057) must be set to continue the energy-saving
operation even for a gradual change in the set
frequency.
• The V/f pattern of the Auto Energy-Saving Control
Note: When setting “Cd071=8”, the setting must be
confirmed to prevent overwriting of data with
the wrong value. (See 7.1 for details of setting
and reconfirmation.)
2) Operation in Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2
• The Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2
function is enabled when “Cd071=8” is set.
No adjustment using other function codes is
required.
• Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2 starts
after the inverter is started in Auto EnergySaving Control Mode 2 and the operation of
the load becomes steady.
• As this function is always active during
energy saving, the same energy-saving effect
can be obtained when the torque of the load is
changing gradually. When the set frequency
or the load torque changes rapidly, the inverter
recovers from the energy-saving operation
and makes up for the insufficient torque.
3) Notes
• The time required before the operation becomes
steady at the most efficient point varies according
to the load status. In some cases, it may take some
ten minutes.
• When the set frequency is changed, when the
STOP command is entered, or when the load
changes rapidly, the load torque becomes insufficient and the driving ability reduces. To counter
this, the function restores the output voltage to the
original voltage in a few milliseconds.
Mode 1 function is linear.
- 80 -
• Unlike the simple energy-saving function, the Auto
Energy-Saving function starts to decelerate
immediately when the STOP command is entered.
The time between the input of the STOP command
and the stopping of the load is the same as that for
the ordinary stop operation. When the inverter is
too slow to absorb the regeneration energy or
when the torque is limited by the torque limiter, the
protective function works and the time becomes
longer.
• The Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2 function is
based on the Sensorless Vector Control mode.
Refer to “Cd071” (Motor Control Mode Selection)
before using this function.
• When operation is started using the Flying Start
function, the Auto Alarm Recovery function, or the
Restart after Momentary Power Failure function,
the Auto Energy-Saving Control Mode 2 function is
restarted from the beginning. (The flying start
operation is enabled.)
• The energy-saving operation is carried out while
the load torque is constant and steady (in the
frequency matching status). Therefore, when the
set frequency changes (e.g. by input of an analog
frequency), a greater frequency matching range
(Cd057) must be set to continue the energy-saving
operation even for a gradual change in the set
frequency. “Cd057” is also related to the frequency matching settings (Cd638-640) of multi-
z Auto tuning method:
(1) Set Cd053, 078 - 081 to the correct values.
(2) Set Cd071 (Cd071=9, 10).
(3) Input the operation signal to start auto tuning.
During auto tuning, the operation panel
indicates that the inverter is in operation. When
auto tuning terminates, the operation panel
indicates that the inverter is stopped. Auto
tuning mode 2 rotates the motor up to the rated
frequency (Cd079) in a direction in accordance
with the operation signal.
(4) An auto-tuning failure is indicated by “
”
on the operation panel.
During auto tuning, confirm the operation panel
display. If “
” is displayed, reconfirm the
settings and conduct auto tuning again.
(5) The auto tuning mode can be forcibly terminated using the stop signal.
Note: Notes on auto tuning mode function
(1) In auto tuning mode 2, disconnect any load from the
motor shaft. If the load cannot be disconnected (ex.
one piece brake motor), auto tuning mode 2 will not
work correctly.
(2) If the settings of Cd053, and 078-081 are incorrect,
auto tuning will not work correctly.
(3) Auto tuning must be conducted in a state where the
motor temperature is normal. When the motor is
overheated because of other test operations auto
tuning will not work correctly.
(4) The auto tuning mode function follows the usual
operation procedure. Therefore, some settings of
function codes may cause the inverter to not operate.
In such a case, confirm whether contradictory
settings have been applied to the function code data
setting, as in the case of normal operation.
(5) Do not auto-tune a motor whose capacity is much
smaller than the capacity of the inverter. If done, the
motor may be damaged. The capacity of the motor to
be auto-tuned should be no more than two ranks
functional terminal output.
z Cd071=9, 10 (Auto tuning function)
• The auto tuning function automatically measures
the constant of the connected motor and this
measurement is used for the inverter. This function
is used when using the sensorless vector control
operation with a motor for which the motor constant
has not been accurately determined or when using
the sensorless vector control operation in a condition where the distance between the inverter and the
motor is over 30 m.
• There are two modes in the auto tuning function;
Auto tuning mode 1 (Cd071=9):
Mode to measure the motor constant without
rotating the motor. Used when the auto tuning
mode 2 cannot be used.
Auto tuning mode 2 (Cd071=10):
Mode to measure the motor constant by
rotating the motor.
(6)
(7)
- 81 -
below the inverter.
Example) Frequency setting is lower than operation
start frequency: No operation. The
frequency setting is invalid during the auto
tuning mode function, though the frequency
setting is valid as the operation start
condition.
Example) Frequency setting is higher than the upper
frequency limit, or is smaller than the lower
frequency limit: No operation.
During operation with auto tuning mode 2;
If an operation signal is input again during deceleration,
operation restarts at the frequency set by Cd079.
Therefore, do not input an operation command until
auto tuning has completely finished.
If an alarm or momentary power failure occurs during
auto tuning, conduct auto tuning again.
• With the ordinary V/f pattern, the voltage
command Vin corresponding to the present
frequency is multiplied by the given gain
using the input value (0 to 10 V) of the inverter
external control terminal VRF1 to give an
output voltage command to the inverter. While
the relationship between the frequency
command and voltage command remains
proportional, the ratio changes depending on
the VRF1 input value. The relationship
between the VRF1 voltage input and the gain
coefficient is as follows:
Gain coefficient
VRF1=0V input →
Vout=Vin – (Vin × 100%)=0 (V)
VRF1=5V input →
Vout=Vin + (Vin × 0%)=Vin (V)
VRF1=10V input →
Vout=Vin + (Vin × 100%)=2Vin (V)
Vin=Current voltage command
Vout=Voltage command after
processing
(8)
During operation with auto tuning mode 2;
If the motor enters the free run status due to a
multifunctional terminal input MBS control signal
(related to Cd630-637) and then the signal is turned
off so as to resume auto tuning, auto tuning will not
work correctly.
(9) Acceleration/deceleration time with auto tuning mode 2
operates with the factory presets for the 1st acceleration/deceleration speed.
(10) If the fixed-shaft tuning is not satisfactory, it must be
performed again.
z Cd071=11 V·f separate function
• This function allows the output frequency and
voltage of the inverter to be set independently.
• The control mode is V/f.
• Cd066: This function is used to select complete
separation type or V·f comparison type.
1) Related function code and inverter control
terminal
Function code
Inverter control terminal
Cd071=11 V·f separate function VRf1 Voltage command input
terminal
Cd066=1 =1:V·f comparison +V1 Variable resistor
or 2 type
connection terminal
=2:Complete
ACM Analog signal
separation type
common terminal
Note: Set the output voltage with Cd005 “Base Voltage.” If
the voltage command is too large at the maximum
variable resistor value, adjust it by setting a smaller
value with Cd005.
• V·f separate function becomes valid when
Cd071=11 is set.
• Cd066 is used to select one of two functions:
complete separation type or V·f comparison
type.
+100%
2) Frequency and voltage command input method.
• The frequency command can be set from the
operation panel or using an external signal
according to 1st Speed Frequency Setting
(Cd002).
Original V/f
voltage command
+0%
Note: Setting the frequency command to VRF1
external analog (Cd002=2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12)
conflicts with the inverter output voltage
command when the V·f separate function is
active. Avoid duplicate setting of the VRF1
terminal function.
Voltage
command
increase and
decrease
-100%
0V
5V
10V
3)-2 Complete separation type
(Cd071=11 and Cd066=2)
• With the base voltage (Cd005) of the ordinary
V/f pattern as the maximum value, this voltage
command is multiplied by the given gain using
the input value (0 to 10 V) of the inverter
external control terminal VRF1 to give an
output voltage command to the inverter. The
frequency command and voltage command
become independent of each other. The
relationship between the VRF1 voltage input
and gain coefficient is as follows:
Gain coefficient (primary function)
VRF1=0V input →
Output voltage=Base voltage × 0
• The output voltage command can be entered
either by applying 0 to 10 VDC directly
between the external control terminals VRF1
and ACM of the inverter, or by applying a
voltage from the +V1 internal power supply of
the inverter to the VRF1 terminal through an
external variable resistor. Attach the external
variable resistor correctly by referring to
“Control Circuit Terminal Connections.”
(Ratings of external variable resistor: Value=
5kΩ max. Capacity=0.3 W min.)
3) Gain of output voltage command
3)-1 V·f comparison type
(Cd071=11 and Cd066=1)
- 82 -
VRF1=5V input →
Output voltage=Base voltage × 0.5
VRF1=10V input →
Output voltage=Base voltage × 1.0
Torque Limiter (Regeneration)
z These functions limit the torque delivered by the
motor in sensorless vector control mode.
Settings for the torque limiter can be set independently for both power running and regeneration
operations. The above functions work in a similar
manner to the output current limiting function (Cd043)
in the V/f mode. However, the motor torque can be
limited directly in sensorless vector control mode.
Base voltage
1.0
Voltage command
Torque Limiter (Power Running)
0.5
0
0V
5V
10V
Note: When the torque limiter value is too small, it may not
be possible to accelerate some loads, or the load
deceleration characteristic may deteriorate.
VRF1 input
Notes:
• This function is invalid during DC braking.
• The AVR function is enabled depending on the base
voltage (Cd005 data).
• The Instability Elimination function (Cd061) is enabled
if specified but frequency and voltage commands
may make the function ineffective.
• The bias and gain settings of VRF1 voltage coefficient are invalid.
• Frequency and voltage commands are independent
of each other. If an excessively large voltage
command is issued for an output frequency, the motor
may be over-excited and an overcurrent may trip the
inverter. Set the frequency and voltage commands
with great care (especially for acceleration and deceleration).
Code setting
Constant
Cd072=
torque load 5 - 200%
(H characteristic/SHF)
Square-law Cd072=
torque load 5 - 150%
(P characteristic/SPF)
Cd073=
5 - 150%
Description
Set the ratio of the generated
torque to the rated torque of
the motor (in 1% steps).
Set the rated torque of a general purpose motor as 100%
of the rating of the inverter.
Multiple for Starting Excitation Current
z Cd071=12 Sensorless vector and V/f control switching
operation
• When the inverter is not operating, this function
sets sensorless vector control or V/f control for the
next operation depending on the value of the target
frequency. The reference frequency for mode
switching is 60 Hz when the motor has two poles or
120 Hz in other cases.
• The control mode can be switched easily, simply by
changing the target frequency.
Example: When the sensorless vector and V/f
control switching operation (Cd071=12) is
selected (Four-pole motor)
• If the inverter is not operating and the
target frequency is higher than 120 Hz,
V/f control mode is set.
• If the inverter is not operating and the
target frequency is equal to or lower
than 120 Hz, sensorless vector control
mode is set.
z The starting excitation current in sensorless vector
control mode is specified using this function code.
This function works in a similar manner to DC braking
force in the V/f mode.
Cd074=1 - 10 (in steps of 1)
If the multiple for the excitation current is too high,
this may result in a stop due to overcurrent.
If the set multiple for the excitation current does not
have any effect upon the braking force, it is possible
that the current limiting function has operated due to
the occurrence of an overcurrent.
Starting Excitation Time
z This is similar to the DC braking time in the V/f mode
at start-up. Set the time for which the excitation
current is applied (current setting for Cd074).
Cd075=0 - 10.0 sec. (in 0.1 sec. steps)
With Cd075=0, there is no braking function at start-up.
z In the event of auto alarm recovery and restart after
momentary power failure, flying start is used instead
of start excitation.
Note: If the frequency is changed when the inverter is
operating in sensorless vector control mode, the
maximum frequency is 60 Hz for a two-pole motor or
120 Hz for other motors.
Note: This setting is dependant on the settings of the
number of motor poles, voltage and capacity (Cd053).
Therefore, changing Cd053 automatically applies the
standard value for the settings of Cd053 to Cd075.
- 83 -
Speed Adjustment Gain
Multiple for Braking Excitation Current
z The excitation current for braking in sensorless vector
control mode is set by this function code. This is
similar to the DC braking force for stopping in the V/f
mode.
Cd076=1 - 10 (in steps of 1)
If the multiple for the excitation current is too high,
this may result in a stop due to an overcurrent.
If the set multiple for the excitation current does not
have any effect upon the braking force, it is possible
that the current limiting function has operated due to
the occurrence of an overcurrent.
z Function code to adjust the speed control accuracy
when using the sensorless vector control mode
(Cd071=2).
Cd082=0.50 - 2.00 (0.01 step)
Large speed decrease during load operation: Set to
less than 1.
Large speed increase during load operation: Set to
over 1.
Note: To adjust this setting, gradually adjust the value in
steps of 0.1 while conducting test operation.
External Analog Input Filter Time Constant
z This function sets a filter time constant for reading
external analog signals.
If noise is detected in external analog signals, adjust
the external analog filter time constant (Cd083).
Set the time constant to N × 10 ms (N = 1 to 500). The
setting range is 10 to 5000 ms.
Braking Excitation Time
z This is similar to the DC braking time for stopping in
the V/f mode. Set the time for which the excitation
current is applied (current setting for Cd076).
Cd077=0 - 10.0 sec. (in 0.1 sec. steps)
With Cd077=0, there is no braking function available
for stopping.
Note: Signals are usually filtered simultaneously at the
VRF1 and IRF/VRF2 terminals. To use PID control
feedback, set the filter time constant for the feedback
value with Cd125. In PID control mode, analog
commands and feedback values can be filtered
independently.
Motor Current Rating
Motor Frequency Rating
Motor Speed Rating
Motor Isolation Type
Copy
z The rated current, frequency, speed of rotation and
isolation type of the motor to be connected are
specified.
Usually, use the motor's rated values. Incorrect
settings reduce the effectiveness of auto tuning and
the control characteristic in the sensorless vector
control mode.
Cd078= Approx. 30 - 110% of inverter rated current
(0.1 A steps)
Cd079= 1: 50 Hz
2: 60 Hz
Cd080= 0 - 24000 r/min. (1 r/min steps)
Cd081= 1: Type A
2: Type E
3: Type B
4: Type F
5: Type H
z This function transfers function code data from the
inverter to the operation panel or to another inverter.
Cd084=1: Transfers the current function code data
to the operation panel.
Cd084=2: Transfers the memory contents from the
operation panel to the inverter.
z Transfer the current function code data first to the
operation panel, then to another inverter.
During copying, “
” keeps flashing on the 7segment display.
z After data transfer to the destination inverter, power
the inverter off and on to reset it.
(Procedure) Copying data to another inverter
1. Transfer the current function code data to the
operation panel with Cd084=1.
” keeps flashing on
2. During data transfer, “
the 7-segment display.
Wait until “
” disappears.
3. Power off the inverter, remove the operation
panel, and mount the panel on the destination
inverter.
Before mounting the panel, power off the
destination inverter as well.
4. Power on the destination inverter.
Note: This setting is dependant on the settings of the
number of motor poles, voltage and capacity (Cd053).
Therefore, changing Cd053 automatically applies the
standard values for the setting of Cd053 to Cd078 081.
Note: These settings are not used in the V/f mode.
- 84 -
z With a setting of Cd085=0, the torque limiter (power
running) value is set by Cd072.
z With a setting of Cd085=1or 3, the torque limiter
(power running) value is determined by the level (0V
to 5V) of a signal input to the VRF1 or VRF2 terminal.
z With a setting of Cd085=2 or 4, the torque limiter
(power running) value is determined by the level (0V
to 10V) of a signal input to the VRF1 or VRF2 terminal.
z With a setting of Cd085=5, the torque limiter (power
running) value is determined by the level (4mA to
20mA) of a signal input to the IRF terminal.
5.
Transfer the data from the operation panel to the
destination inverter with Cd084=2.
” keeps flashing on
6. During data transfer, “
the 7-segment display.
Wait until “
” disappears.
7. After data transfer to the destination inverter,
power the inverter off and on to reset it.
z This function does not copy Cd053, Cd078, Cd084,
Cd097, Cd098, Cd099, Cd100, or Cd140 or other
function codes or data that enable optional functions.
Some data may not be copied between inverters of
different capacities or rated voltages. (Example:
Cd005)
P characteristic 150%
H
characteristic
200%
Note 1: The copy function is controlled using the software
version numbers, and may not work if the software
versions are not compatible. In addition, there may
be cases where alarms and other functions do not
behave as expected when settings are copied from
one inverter that has additional functions to another
inverter that does not have these functions due to a
difference in software. Be sure to confirm that all
required functions are available before copying
settings to an inverter. We recommend that you
install a software upgrade if the software versions
of the inverters are significantly different. For
details of upgrades, please contact the retailer.
Note 2: If an error occurs during data transfer to the
operation panel, do not transfer data back to the
same or to another inverter.
Note 3: The display flashes to indicate that the copy
function is in operation. When the display is
flashing, do not remove or mount the operation
panel or turn the power on or off.
Note 4: When the copy function is in operation, the
operation panel keys are disabled.
Note 5: This code cannot be written using the communication function. “Undefined” is returned in response
to a write attempt.
Note 6: The copy function is not available on the remote
operation panel (optional).
Powerrunning
torque
limiter
5%
0V
5V
0V
10V
4mA
20mA
Control circuit terminal VRF1 and VRF2/IRF input value
Cd085 = 1,3
Cd085 = 2,4
Cd085 = 5
Note 1: The power-running torque limiter varies in the range
of 5% to 200% of the value that is input to the
control terminal (for H characteristic) or in the range
of 5% to 150% of the value that is input to the
control terminal (for P characteristic)
Note 2: This function is valid only in the Sensorless Vector
Control mode.
Torque Limiter Analog Input (Regeneration)
z This function allows the torque limiter (regeneration)
to be controlled by analog commands that are input to
the VRF and IRF control terminals.
Cd086=0: Limit using Cd073
Cd086=1,3: Limit using the signal on the VRF1 or
VRF2 terminal (0V to 5V)
Cd086=2,4: Limit using the signal on the VRF1 or
VRF2 terminal (0V to 10V)
Cd086=5: Limit using the signal on the IRF terminal
(4mA to 20mA)
z With a setting of Cd086=0, the torque limiter (regeneration) value is set by Cd073.
z With a setting of Cd086=1 or 3, the torque limiter
(regeneration) value is determined by the level (0V to
5V) of a signal input to the VRF terminal.
z With a setting of Cd086=2 or 4, the torque limiter
(regeneration) value is determined by the level (0V to
10V) of a signal input to the VRF terminal.
z With a setting of Cd086=5, the torque limiter (regeneration) value is determined by the level (4mA to 20mA)
of a signal input to the IRF terminal.
Torque Limiter Analog Input
(Power Running)
z This function varies the torque limiter (power running)
according to analog commands that are input to the
VRF and IRF control terminals.
Cd085=0: Limit using Cd072
Cd085=1: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0V to 5V)
Cd085=2: Limit using the signal on the VRF1
terminal (0V to 10V or variable resistor)
Cd085=3: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0V to 5V)
Cd085=4: Limit using the signal on the VRF2
terminal (0V to 10V or variable resistor)
Cd085=5: Limit using the signal on the IRF terminal
(4mA to 20mA)
- 85 -
100%
Start of S-shaped Acceleration
End of S-shaped Acceleration
Regeneration
torque limiter
Gradient of Middle of S-shaped Acceleration
Start of S-shaped Deceleration
End of S-shaped Deceleration
20%
0V
0V
4mA
Control circuit terminal VRF1 and VRF2/IRF
input value
5V
10V
20mA
Gradient of S-shaped Deceleration
Cd086 = 1,3
Cd086 = 2,4
Cd086 = 5
z Function codes to alter the shape of acceleration/
deceleration curve when specifying S-shaped acceleration/deceleration (Cd017=2) in the acceleration/
deceleration mode. The shape of the S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration curve can be set independently for both acceleration and deceleration. Also,
the curvature of the start and end of the curve, and the
gradient of the middle portion can be set individually.
Cd090 - 092 are the settings for acceleration, and
Cd093 - 095 are for deceleration. The method of
setting is described below. As the same method
applies to both acceleration and deceleration, only the
method of setting acceleration is described here.
Cd090=0 - 100% (1% step): Specifies the curvature of
the start portion of the acceleration.
With 0, the start portion is a linear
acceleration, and with 100, the curvature
is maximum.
Cd091=0 - 100% (1% step): Specifies the curvature of
the end portion of the acceleration. With
0, the end portion is a linear acceleration,
and with 100, the curvature is maximum.
Cd092=0 - 100% (1% step): Specifies the gradient of
the middle portion of the acceleration.
With 0, the portion is the gradient set in
Cd018 - 022, and with 100, the gradient is
twice the gradient set in Cd018 - 022.
z When the settings are changed during S-shaped
acceleration or deceleration, the new settings are valid
from the next acceleration/deceleration.
z In the case of the S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
mode, the time until the frequency is reached varies
depending on the settings of Cd090 - 095. The time is
calculated as follows:
Note 1: The regeneration torque limiter varies in the range
of 5% to 100% of the value that is input to the
control terminals.
Note 2: This function is valid only in the Sensorless Vector
Control mode.
Function to Switch “
When Stopped
” and “
” Alarms
z This function selects which alarm function “OV”
(Overvoltage) or “LV” (Undervoltage) of the inverter is
selected.
Cd087=0: “OV” valid and “LV” invalid when
stopped
Cd087=1: “OV” invalid and “LV” valid when
stopped
Cd087=2: “OV” invalid and “LV” invalid when
stopped
Cd087=3: “OV” valid and “LV” valid when stopped
Note 1: Even when the selected alarm function (“OV” or
“LV”) is invalidated by this function, the protection
function is enabled. The Alarm Display (on the
operation panel), Alarm Relay Output, and Alarm
Log functions are disabled.
Note 2: This function is effective when the “OV” or “LV”
Alarm Display or Alarm Relay Output function is not
available (because of an error in an external
sequence).
ASR Proportional Gain
ASR Integral Gain
z These codes respectively control the ASR proportional and integral gains in the Sensorless Vector
Control mode and with the vector control option.
Typical values have been factory-set as defaults for
these codes. When these gains must be adjusted,
change these codes.
Cd088 = 0.00 to 7.80
Cd089 = 0.00 to 106.00
Ts =
200
T
×
+
100 + gradient
2
of middle of Sshaped curve
Curvature of start of S-shaped curve +
Curvature of end of S-shaped curve
200
Ts: Time to reach the target frequency in the S-shaped
acceleration/deceleration mode (in seconds)
T: Time to reach the target frequency in the linear
acceleration/deceleration mode with the settings of
Cd018-026 (in seconds)
- 86 -
Curvature of start of S-shaped curve:
Setting of Cd090 or Cd093 (%)
Curvature of end of S-shaped curve:
Setting of Cd091 or Cd094 (%)
Gradient of middle of S-shaped curve:
Setting of Cd092 or Cd095 (%)
(Calculation example) Acceleration from 20 Hz to 50 Hz
at the 1st acceleration/deceleration
Cd018=50(Hz):
Acceleration/deceleration standard time setting
Cd019=5 (in seconds):
Acceleration time setting
Cd090=50(%):
S-shaped curve with medium-curvature start
Cd091=50(%):
S-shaped curve with medium-curvature end
Cd092=0(%):
Gradient of the middle portion is the same as
that for linear acceleration
5 sec.
× (50Hz - 20Hz) = 3 sec.
50Hz
3 sec.
200
50 + 50
(2) Ts =
×
+
2
100 + 0
200
Frequency
command
Frequency
Acceleration
Deceleration
Time
Example 3) Cd090=0, Cd091=0, Cd092=0, Cd093=0,
Cd094=0, Cd095=0
Consequently, the same acceleration as that of the
linear acceleration/deceleration mode.
Frequency
command
Frequency
Acceleration
Deceleration
Time
Example 4) Cd090=0, Cd091=100, Cd092=0, Cd093=0,
Cd094=100, Cd095=0
Effective for acceleration/deceleration of a squarereduced torque load, such as a fan.
(1) T =
= 3.75 sec.
z The following are examples of the S-shaped curve with
different combinations of settings. The standard
acceleration/deceleration time and the acceleration/
deceleration time settings are the same in all examples.
Cd018=50 (Hz)
Cd019=5 (in seconds)
Cd023=5 (in seconds)
Example 1) Cd090=100, Cd091=100, Cd092=100,
Cd093=100, Cd094=100, Cd095=100
• The time taken to reach the set frequency is
the same as that for linear acceleration.
However, since the gradient of the middle
portion is twice as that of the linear acceleration/deceleration mode, the current limiting
function may operate depending on the
magnitude of the load inertia.
Acceleration
Acceleration
Deceleration
Deceleration
Time
Function Lock
z To prevent an operation error, the operation panel can
be locked.
Cd096=0: Code data can be changed.
Cd096=1: No code data can be changed except
Cd096 (it is also impossible to change
the setting of the frequency).
Cd096=2: No code data can be changed except
Cd096 and Cd028 - Cd036) (it is also
impossible to change the setting of the
frequency).
Cd096=3: No code data can be changed except
Cd096 and data changes using the
communication function
Cd096=4: Code data unchangeable (except for
Cd096, Cd175 or Cd182, pressure
command.)
Frequency
command
Frequency
Frequency
command
Frequency
Time
Operation Time Display
Example 2) Cd090=100, Cd091=100, Cd092=0,
Cd093=100, Cd094=100, Cd095=0
The curvature of the acceleration/deceleration's start
portion and end portion is maximum. The gradient of
the acceleration/deceleration’s middle portion is the
same as that of the linear acceleration/deceleration
mode.
z This function displays the total operation time (in
hours) of the inverter. (Read-only)
Reading Alarm Data
z This function allows you to read the last five alarms
stored in the memory in chronological sequence.
- 87 -
Cd098=1:
Use the
Start reading data
and
Operation Panel Remote/Local
Selection
keys to read the last five alarms
issued. Every time the
or
z This function is used to set the remote operation panel
(optional) to remote mode.
Setting Cd100=1 changes the panel to local mode.
This function is valid only when the remote operation
panel is mounted.
z The Stop key is valid in both modes. The display
contents are also identical.
key is pressed the
next or previous alarm is displayed.
Cd098=9:
Data in the alarm memory is cleared.
Data Initialization
z This function initializes function code data to the
factory presets or user’s initialization data.
Cd099=1: Initializes to factory presets.
Cd099=2: Erases motor constants measured by
auto tuning.
Cd099=3: Initializes to user’s initialization data.
Cd099=99: Sets a user's initialization value.
• Cd097 and Cd098 are not initialized.
(Procedure 1) Setting a user’s initialization value
1. Set the required function code.
2. Identify this value as the user’s initialization
value with Cd099=99.
” and the
3. The confirmation message “
set value start flashing. Press the
Note: The copy function is not available on the remote
operation panel (optional).
Operation Mode Selection
z This function selects an operation mode.
Cd101=0: Ordinary operation
Cd101=1: Simple scheduled operation
Cd101=2: Disturbed operation
z Cd101=1 Simple scheduled operation function
• This function automatically executes an operating
pattern (including direction of rotation, set frequency, operation time, acceleration/deceleration
time, etc.) that has been set by function codes in
advance. This function is effective for automatic
operation according to a preset operation sequence.
• Up to 8 operation patterns (including the operationstop timer pattern) can be specified. It is also
possible to repeat a cycle of these eight patterns a
preset number of times. When power to the system
is cut off, these operation patterns are stored in
non-volatile memory so that the operation may be
continued from the succeeding pattern when power
is recovered.
1) Related function codes and control terminals of
the inverter
key to
confirm the value.
4. “
” keeps flashing while the user's
initialization value is being stored. Wait until
“
” disappears.
5. Once “
” has disappeared, the function
code data can be initialized to the user’s initialization data with Cd099=3.
(Procedure 2) Initializing to the user's initialization
data
1. Execute Cd099=3 to initialize the function code
data to the user’s initialization data determined
with Cd099=99.
” and the
2. The confirmation message “
set value start flashing. Press the
6th Speed Frequency Cd112=1 - 4
Cd030=0 - 600Hz
key to
Cd031=0 - 600Hz
Cd032=0 - 600Hz
Cd035=0 - 600Hz
7th Speed Frequency Cd113=××
Cd638 - 640=3
End of Simple
Cd114=××
Scheduled Operation
Cycle
Reset of Simple
Cd115=××
Scheduled Operation
Timer
Simple Scheduled
Cd116=××
Operation
Cd630 - 637=35
Note 1: If Cd099=3 (Initialization to User’s Initialization Data)
is executed with no user's initialization data
determined, “
” is displayed.
” and “
Cd034=0 - 600Hz
Cd029=0 - 600Hz
confirm the value.
” keeps flashing while the function
3. “
code data is being initialized to the user’s
initialization data. Wait until “
” disappears.
4. “
” disappears when initialization is
complete.
Note 2: “
Cd033=0 - 600Hz
Function code
1st Speed Frequency Cd106=0.0 - 6500.0
Setting
sec.
1st Speed Frequency Cd107=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
2nd Speed Frequency Cd108=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
3rd Speed Frequency Cd109=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
4th Speed Frequency Cd110=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
5th Speed Frequency Cd111=1 - 4
Cd002=1 - 9
Cd101=1
Cd102= 0 - 250
times
Number of Repeti- Cd117=××
tions of Simple
Scheduled Operation
Cd103=0.0 - 6500.0 Operation Timer T1 Cd118=××
sec.
” are not displayed for
serial communication function.
Cd104=0.0 - 6500.0 Operation Timer T2 Cd119=××
sec.
Cd105=0.0 - 6500.0 Operation Timer T3
sec.
- 88 -
Operation Timer T4
Operation Timer T5
Operation Timer T6
Operation Timer T7
Operation Stop Timer T0
Midway Stop Deceleration
Time
Midway Start Acceleration
Time
Forward/Reverse
Deceleration in T1 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T2 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T3 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T4 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T5 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T6 Pattern
Forward/Reverse
Acceleration/Deceleration
in T7 Pattern
Note 4: As the acceleration/deceleration time for a simple
scheduled operation is specified for respective
operation timers, changing acceleration/deceleration
times using the AD2 and AD3 multifunctional input
terminals is disabled. (Set AD2 and AD3 in Cd630 to
637) However, when the AD3 terminal is selected
by “Cd630 - 637=38” (Operation Signal Hold), the
function is enabled.
Control terminal of the inverter
*1
Cycle End Function
PTR*2 Timer Reset Function
DCM1
Digital Signal Common Terminal
DCM2
Digital Signal Common Terminal
*1 Set using Cd638 - 640.
*2 Set using Cd630 -639.
2) Starting a simple scheduled operation
• Set “Cd101=1” (Simple Scheduled Operation).
The Simple Scheduled Operation function is
enabled in V/f and Sensorless Vector Control
modes.
• Only the forward run command is valid as an
operation command on the operation panel,
external control circuit terminals, etc. Always
enter the forward run command regardless of
the direction of rotation.
• The direction of rotation and an acceleration/
deceleration time can be set for each of the
timers T1 to T7.
Setting method
• Enter a 2-digit value indicating the direction of
rotation and the acceleration/deceleration time
for each code (T1 to T7).
Example: Setting of “Reverse” and “3rd
Acceleration/Deceleration Time” for
the T1 operation timer
Cd113 = 2 3
1:
2:
3:
4:
3) Timer operations in simple scheduled operations
• When the forward run command is entered, a
simple scheduled operation of a specified
direction of rotation and a specified acceleration/deceleration time starts. At the same time,
the operation timers T1 to T7 and T0 start
counting in sequence. When the first operation timer counts up, the next timer starts
counting. This is repeated in the order T1, T2,
T3,...,T7, and T0. An operation timer whose
set time is 0.0 seconds is skipped.
Timer setting
Operation timer T1: Cd103=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T2: Cd104=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T3: Cd105=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T4: Cd106=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T5: Cd107=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T6: Cd108=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Operation timer T7: Cd109=0.0 - 6500.0
seconds
Set a desired time for each operation timer.
Specification of acceleration/
deceleration time
1st acceleration/deceleration time
(Cd019 and Cd023)
2nd acceleration/deceleration time
(Cd020 and Cd024)
3rd acceleration/deceleration time
(Cd021 and Cd025)
4th acceleration/deceleration time
(Cd022 and Cd026)
Note: When you set a timer value for an operation
timer that is in operation (counting), the setting
is valid in the next and later operation cycles.
When you set a timer value for the operation
timer that is to be in operation next, the setting
is valid for the operation timer.
Specification of direction of rotation
1: forward
• Operation Stop Timer T0 (Cd110)
The Simple Scheduled Operation function
uses the operation stop timer T0 (Cd110) in
addition to the operation timers T1 to T7. This
timer is used to stop the current operation
cycle (one cycle of operation timers T1 to T7)
and start the next operation cycle (the next
cycle of operation timers T1 to T7) after a
preset time period.
Cd110 = 0.0 to 6500.0 seconds
2: reverse
Note 1: The jog operation is performed normally before a
simple scheduled operation starts. (The forward or
reverse run is enabled.)
The jog operation is also performed normally when
simple scheduled operation stops.
Note 2: Methods and conditions for starting and braking in
simple scheduled operation are the same as those
for ordinary operation unless otherwise specified.
Note 3: When the direction of rotation of the motor is fixed
by the Cd050 code (Fix direction of rotation of
motor), the inverter waits for the next operation
timer while the operation timer for the opposite
direction of rotation specified by T1 to T7 is on.
Note 1: You cannot specify a frequency value for
the period defined by operation stop timer
T0. While the operation stop timer is in
operation, the inverter always decelerates
to stop the motor.
- 89 -
Note 2: This deceleration-to-stop time is specified
by “Cd111 =1 to 4” (Midway Stop Deceleration Time).
Note 3: If the inverter is still decelerating to stop the
motor even when the operation stop timer
T0 has finished counting, the next operation
cycle waits until the inverter stops
completely. Therefore, it is recommended
to set a timer period longer than the time
taken to decelerate and stop at the end of
operation timer T7.
Note 4: The braking operation is the same as that in
the ordinary operation. (DC braking,
braking excitation, and free-run stop
functions are available.)
Note 5: When the operation stop timer is not
required, specify “Cd110=0.0.” Operation
timer T1 starts immediately after operation
timer T7 when the operation timer T7 has
finished counting. The inverter runs the
motor without a break.
Operation timer T5: Determined by the value
of Cd033 (= 0 to 600Hz).
Operation timer T6: Determined by the value
of Cd034 (= 0 to 600Hz).
Operation timer T7: Determined by the value
of Cd035 (= 0 to 600Hz).
Note 1: When the set frequency value is changed by a
multi-speed frequency code (Cd029 to Cd035),
using the step keys on the operation panel, or by
the terminal board step function while an operation
timer (T1 to T7) is in operation, the set frequency of
the operation timer that is in operation is changed.
The new frequency is reflected in the Multi-Speed
Frequency function code.
Example: When you change the set frequency
value by pressing the operation panel key
while the operation timer T2 is in
operation, this function increases or
decreases the frequency to the new
frequency value. The new frequency
value is set in “Cd030.”
Note 2: In the simple scheduled operation, changing speeds
using the control circuit input terminals is disabled
because speeds are respectively set by operation
timers (Set by Cd630 to 637). However, when the
2DF and 3DF are selected by a function other than
the 2nd Speed and 3rd Speed functions (Cd066 = 2
and Cd067 = 2), the function is enabled.
Specified by Cd111
Frequency
Deceleration
to stop
Inverter
stopped
T6
T7
1st operation cycle
T0
T1
2nd operation cycle
Time
5) Simple Scheduled Operation Cycle End signal
• If the control terminal output function is set to
End of Simple Scheduled Operation Cycle (one
of Cd638 to 640 is set to 3), when the inverter
stops in operation cycle T0 or when DC
braking or braking excitation is carried out, the
open collector output between the control
circuit output terminals and DCM1,2,3 turns
on for about 200msec. Use this Cycle End
signal to turn off the external operation
command at the end of one cycle or for
synchronization with the peripheral units of
the inverter.
4) Setting a frequency value for each timer
• Use the standard function codes for multispeed frequencies (1st to 7th speed frequencies) to set frequencies for operation timers.
When “Cd002” (1st Speed Frequency Setting)
is 1, 13, or 14, the 1st speed frequency
specified by CD029 is used as the frequency
value. If any other value is specified, the
value of the specified function is the set
frequency. In other words, an analog frequency or binary or BCD value can be
specified for operation timer T1.
Setting methods
Operation timer T1: Specify Cd002 = 1 to 16.
When Cd002 = 1, 3, or 14 → 1st speed
frequency (Cd029)
When Cd002 = 2 to 12 → Analog frequency
input (on VRF1 and IRF/VRF2 terminals)
When Cd002 = 15 or 16 → Digital frequency input (An optional PC board is
required.)
Operation timer T2: Determined by the value
of Cd030 (= 0 to 600Hz).
Operation timer T3: Determined by the value
of Cd031 (= 0 to 600Hz).
Operation timer T4: Determined by the value
of Cd032 (= 0 to 600Hz).
1 cycle
T7
T0
Deceleration
to stop
The inverter stops or
DC braking or braking
excitation is on.
Frequency
One of Cd638 - Cd640= 3
Between control circuit
output terminal and DCM
OFF
Approx.
200 msec.
Approx.
200 msec.
ON
ON
Free run stop
Time
Stop by deceleration, DC
braking, or braking excitation
Note 1: The Simple Scheduled Operation Cycle End signal is
output each time the operation stop timer T0 works.
To suppress this cycle end signal, avoid setting
“Cd062 - Cd640=3” or set 0.0 for “Cd110” (T0
Operation Stop).
- 90 -
Note 2: If the inverter stops or DC braking or braking
excitation starts while the operation timer for the
end of all operation cycles is in operation, the
Simple Scheduled Operation Cycle End signal turns
on independently of the status of the operation
timer.
Setting method
Select a midway-stop deceleration time using
the “Cd111” code as follows:
Cd111=1: Selects the 1st deceleration time
(Cd023).
Cd111=2: Selects the 2nd deceleration time
(Cd024).
Cd111=3: Selects the 3rd deceleration time
(Cd025).
Cd111=4: Selects the 4th deceleration time
(Cd026).
6) Simple scheduled operation and code settings
• An example of a simple scheduled operation
determined by function codes is shown below.
Operation timers T0 (Cd103) to T7 (Cd110):0 to
6500.0 seconds
Multi-speed Frequency Setting “1st Speed”
(Cd029) to “7th Speed” (Cd035):
0 to 400 Hz
Forward/Reverse, Acceleration/Deceleration:
Cd113 to Cd119
Number of repetitions (Cd102):
0 to 250 (0 for infinite)
• If the operation starting condition is satisfied
while stopped due to a midway stop, the
inverter accelerates (increases) the frequency
towards the set frequency of the operation
timer and starts the operation from midway.
The acceleration time is determined according
to the setting of “Cd112” (Midway Start
Acceleration Time)
The Cd112 value can be in the range of Cd019
(1st Acceleration Time) to Cd022 (4th Acceleration Time). When the frequency reaches
the set frequency, the held operation timer
starts again.
Setting method
Select a midway start acceleration time using
the “Cd112” code.
Cd112=1: Selects the 1st acceleration time
(Cd019).
Cd112=2: Selects the 2nd acceleration time
(Cd020).
Cd112=3: Selects the 3rd acceleration time
(Cd021).
Cd112=4: Selects the 4th acceleration time
(Cd022).
2nd speed
(Cd030)
RUN signal
1st speed
(Cd029)
Output frequency
Note: When the STOP (or Free-Run) command is input to
the inverter, the value of the current operation timer is
immediately held until operation is restarted. When
the RUN command is entered again and the original
set frequency is reached, the operation timer starts
again.
3rd speed
(Cd031)
4th speed
(Cd032)
Forward
(Stop)
5th speed
(Cd033)
Reverse
7th speed
(Cd035)
6th
speed
(Cd034)
Acceleration/
Deceleration
and Forward/
Reverse
Cd103
T1
Cd113
Cd104
T2
Cd114
Cd105
T3
Cd115
Cd106
T4
Cd116
Cd107
T5
Cd117
Cd108
T6
Cd118
Cd109
T7
Cd119
Cd110
T0
Cd111
T1
1 cycle
Time
7) Midway stopping or starting a simple scheduled
operation
• If you have to stop the inverter while a simple
scheduled operation is in progress, you can
set the deceleration time to stop the motor
independently of the setting of the operation
timer.
• When a STOP command (or alarm) is entered
to the inverter while an operation timer (T1 to
T6) is in operation, the inverter decelerates to
stop the motor or stops the motor without
braking (free run stop) and the simple scheduled operation stops midway. The deceleration-to-stop time is determined by the setting
of “Cd111” (Midway Stop Deceleration Time).
The value of Cd111 can be in the range of
Cd023 (1st Deceleration Time) to Cd026 (4th
Deceleration Time).
Reference:
When the operation is stopped midway, the
Midway Stop function stores the preceding
status of the operation timers even when the
power to the system is shut off. Therefore, you
can start from the aborted operation even on the
next day.
- 91 -
Operation timer stop
T3
T4
T1
Returns to the start
T3
Decelerates
for
midway
stop
Cd111
T4
Frequency
Frequency
Decelerates
for midway
stop
Cd111
Accelerates for
midway stop
Cd112
Timer
reset
Cd113
Operation timer stop
The timer
restarts
Approx. 100ms
or more
Midway
stop
One of Cd630 - Cd637= 35
Between control circuit
output terminal and DCM
Original T4 time setting
Open
Open
Short-circuit
RUN command
ON
OFF
RUN command
ON
ON
Time
OFF
ON
Time
8) Function to reset the simple scheduled operation
timer when held by the Midway Stop function
• When the simple scheduled operation is
stopped midway, the simple scheduled
operation timer that is in operation is held.
Therefore, when conditions for restarting
operation are satisfied, the inverter accelerates
(increases) the frequency towards the set
frequency of this operation timer and starts
operation from the point at which the operation stopped. If it is not necessary to hold the
operation timer, you can reset the operation
timer from the control terminals of the inverter.
• This Timer Reset function resets all simple
scheduled operation timers. Therefore, the
next operation starts with the first of operation
timers T1 to T7.
Setting and resetting
• Set the multifunctional input terminal to
function as the simple scheduled operation
timer reset. (Set one of Cd630 - Cd637 to 35.)
• If the inverter stops midway through the
operation of an operation timer, connect the
control circuit terminals to the DCM1 or DCM2
for at least 100 msec to reset the simple
scheduled operation timers.
• Be sure to reset the simple scheduled operation timers before the next RUN command is
entered after the inverter has stopped completely. Timer resetting is not possible while
the inverter is in operation, in the standby
status, or while accelerating after restarting.
Note: If the timer reset is continuously input, the operation
timers will be reset again at the next midway stop.
Therefore, input the reset signal only when it is
required.
z Cd101=2 (Disturbed Operation Function)
• This function repeatedly changes between two set
frequencies in a preset acceleration/deceleration
time. This function is useful in systems where the
frequency must be varied, for example to match the
difference in diameter of each end of a bobbin in a
bobbin winding system.
• With this function, you can modulate the set
frequency freely by external analog commands.
Therefore, you can adjust the frequency value
according to the status of the load.
1) Related function codes and control terminals of
the inverter
Cd019=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
Cd020=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
Cd023=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
Cd024=0.0 - 6500.0
sec.
Cd029=0 - 600Hz
Cd030=0 - 600Hz
Function code
1st acceleration time Cd036=0 - 600Hz
8th speed frequency
2nd acceleration time Cd055=0 - ±600Hz
Gain frequency
1st deceleration time Cd101=2
Disturbed operation
2nd deceleration time Cd120=1 - 5
Analog input switching
1st speed frequency
Disturb modulation rate
Cd121=0 - 50%
2nd speed frequency
Inverter control terminal
VRF1
Voltage signal modulation input
VRF2
Voltage signal modulation input
IRF
Current signal modulation input
ACM
Analog signal common terminal
2) Basic disturbed operation
• Set Cd101=2 (Disturbed Operation Function).
Disturbed operation can be used in either
motor control mode (V/f mode or Sensorless
Vector Control mode).
• There are two frequency setting values: 1st
speed frequency (Cd029) and 2nd speed
frequency (Cd030).
• When the RUN command is entered, the
inverter repeatedly changes from the 1st speed
frequency to the 2nd speed frequency and
back to the 1st speed frequency, and so on.
- 92 -
When the output frequency reaches either of
the set frequencies, it is increased or decreased (∆F) so that the set frequency is only
attained momentarily for the minimum acceleration/deceleration time. This is to prevent
problems such as uneven bobbin winding.
When the output frequency reaches the 1st
speed frequency, this function subtracts the
8th speed frequency (Cd036) from the 1st
speed frequency. When the output frequency
reaches the 2nd speed frequency, this function
adds the 8th speed frequency to the 2nd
speed frequency.
New set frequency when the output
frequency reaches the 1st speed frequency:
1st speed frequency - 8th speed
frequency (∆F)
New set frequency when the output
frequency reaches the 2nd speed frequency:
2nd speed frequency + 8th speed
frequency (∆F)
• In disturbed operation, the acceleration/
deceleration times are used as follows:
The 1st acceleration/deceleration time is used
to vary the frequency at the start (from the
input of the RUN command to reaching the 1st
speed frequency) and at the end of operation
(from the input of the stop command until the
inverter comes to a stop). The 2nd acceleration/deceleration time is used to vary the
frequency at other times.
RUN
signal
Note 3: In the Disturbed Operation mode, the acceleration/
deceleration times for the 1st and 2nd speed
frequencies are fixed. Therefore, changing
acceleration/deceleration times using the AD2 and
AD3 control terminals is disabled (except when the
control circuit input terminal is selected by “Cd630Cd637=38” (Operation Signal Hold)).
Note 4: In the Disturbed Operation mode, only the 1st and
2nd speeds are used. Therefore, changing speeds
using the 2DF and 3DF control terminals is disabled.
Note 5: When the Flying Start, Auto Alarm Recovery, or
Restart after Momentary Power Failure function is
used, the inverter increases or decreases the
output frequency towards the 1st speed frequency
to restart.
3) Modulation (Frequency Change) function in
disturbed operation
• The 1st and 2nd speed frequencies that are set
can be changed (modulated) by an external
analog command in disturbed operation.
When “Cd120” (Analog Input Switching) is
not “0,” the speed frequencies can be changed
by the analog input corresponding to the
setting of Cd120. The gain (frequency) of the
maximum analog command is set by “Cd055”
or “Cd063” (Gain Frequency Setting). Further,
as only positive analog inputs are used and
the frequency setting value can be increased
or decreased, the offset of the disturb modulation can be adjusted by “Cd121” (Disturb
Modulation Rate).
Setting and changing
• Specify the value that you want to change
using “Cd120” (Analog Input Switching).
Cd120=0: Not changed
Cd120=1: Input (0V to 5V) between VRF1
and ACM terminals
Cd120=2: Input (0V to 10V) between VRF1
and ACM terminals
Cd120=3: Input (0V to 5V) between VRF2
and ACM terminals
Cd120=4: Input (0V to 10V) between VRF2
and ACM terminals
Cd120=5: Input (4mA to 20mA) between
IRF and ACM terminals
• Set the maximum analog input value using
“Cd055” or “Cd063” (Gain Frequency Setting).
Cd055 = 0 to ±600Hz
The gain frequency indicates the value by
which the set frequency is changed when the
analog command specified by Cd120 is at its
maximum value. In other words, it is the gain
of the analog input. When a gain frequency is
determined, the modulation function converts
the entered analog signal into a modulation
ON
2nd
acceleration
time
Cd020
1st speed
frequency
Cd029
OFF
F
1st
acceleration
time
Cd019
Output
frequency
F
2nd speed
frequency
Cd030
2nd
deceleration
time
Cd024
8th speed frequency Cd036
1st
deceleration
time
Cd023
Time
*1. ∆F is added to the value of Cd030 or subtracted from the value of Cd029.
*2. The period of "∆F" is the maximum acceleration/deceleration time.
Note 1: The 1st speed frequency in disturbed operation is
fixed to the value of Cd029. Therefore, you cannot
set the 1st speed frequency using the external
analog or digital input function (optional) or the
terminal board step function. To set the 1st speed
frequency, specify Cd002 = 1 or 14.
Note 2: Jog operation before the disturbed operation works
normally.
- 93 -
The offset should be
Cd121 = 0% to 50%.
In this case, the rate indicates where the 0Hz
point of the modulated frequency is relative to
the modulated analog input. This specification changes the gain of the analog modulation input and the modulation frequency, but
the range of the modulation frequency is fixed
to the value set by the Gain Frequency
setting(Cd055 or Cd063).
Example 1: Cd120=2 and Cd055=+50Hz,
Cd121=50% (VRF1 used)
frequency, and adds it to the two set frequencies (1st and 2nd speed frequencies) for the
disturbed operation. With this, new modulated frequencies are generated. However, the
function codes of the 1st and 2nd speed
frequencies remain unchanged. Negative gain
frequency can be also set. In this case the
modulation frequency has a negative value,
and has a negative gradient relative to an
increase in the analog command input. The
negative modulation frequency represents
“subtraction” in the disturbed operation.
Example 1: Cd120=2 and Cd055=+50Hz (VRF1
used)
25Hz
50Hz
Modulation
frequency
Modulation
frequency
0Hz
25Hz
-25Hz
0
5V
10V
Analog input
0Hz
0
5V
Example 2:
10V
Analog input
Example 2: Cd120=5 and Cd055=-30Hz (VRF1
used)
Cd120=3 and Cd055=30Hz,
Cd121=25% (VRF1 used.)
7.5Hz
Modulation
frequency
0Hz
0Hz
Modulation
frequency
-7.5Hz
-15Hz
-22.5Hz
4mA
-30Hz
4mA
8mA
12mA
20mA
Analog input
12mA
20mA
Analog input
ON
• Offset of the modulation frequency
After the modulation frequency has been
adjusted by the analog input, the result is
added to the two set frequencies (1st and 2nd
speed frequencies) for the disturbed operation. However, as shown in Examples 1 and 2,
modulation is achieved either by addition or
subtraction alone according to the polarity of
the gain frequency (Cd055 or Cd063). If you
want to modulate the original set frequencies
(1st and 2nd speed frequencies) up and down,
specify an offset value using the disturb
modulation rate (Cd121).
RUN
signal
1st speed frequency value
OFF
1st speed frequency
(not modulated)
Modulated
frequency
0Hz
Output
frequency
0Hz
2nd speed frequency (not modulated)
Output
frequency
2nd speed
frequency value
Modulation frequency
* In case of modulation rate Cd121=50%
- 94 -
Time
z The analog signals that can be output from the
AOUT1 and AOUT2 terminals and the actual values
are converted as follows:
Note 1: When both the disturbed operation and the Internal
PID Control mode (Cd071=3) are selected at the
same time, the modulation function is disabled
because the modulation input and the feedback
input conflict with each other.
Note 2: The Bias Frequency setting function (Cd054) does
not affect the modulation input in the modulation of
the disturbed operation.
Cd126/128
Output signal
setting
0
No function
(no output)
1
Set frequency
2
Output frequency
3
Output current
4
DC voltage
Internal Analog Output Function 1
Internal Analog Output Function 2
Internal Analog Output Coefficient 1
5
6
Internal Analog Output Coefficient 2
z These functions output various internal statuses of
the inverter between analog output terminals AOUT1/
2 and analog signal common terminal ACM of the
control circuit in an analog form (0 to 10 V).
Cd126: AOUT1
Cd128: AOUT2
Cd126,128=0: No function
Cd126,128=1: Set frequency
Cd126,128=2: Output frequency
Cd126,128=3: Output current
Cd126,128=4: DC voltage
Cd126,128=5: Fin temperature
Cd126,128=6: Load factor (Electrothermal
level integrated value)
Cd126,128=7: Output of converted analog
input value (VRF1 control
circuit terminal input)
Cd126,128=8: Output of converted analog
input value (IRF/VRF2
control circuit terminal
input)
Cd126, 128=9: Output voltage
Cd126, 128=10: Load factor (Percentage in
terms of rated current)
Cd126, 128=11: Detected speed (Option)
Cd126, 128=12: Output power (V/f mode
only)
z Output signals can be increased or decreased by the
internal analog output coefficients Cd127 and Cd129.
If the output signal from the AOUT1 or AOUT2
terminal is not of an adequate level, the signal level
can be adjusted by setting the internal analog output
coefficient.
Cd127: Coefficient for Cd126 (Internal Analog
Output Function 1)
Cd129: Coefficient for Cd128 (Internal Analog
Output Function 2)
7
8
Fin temperature
Load factor
(Electrothermal
level integrated value)
Analog input
(VRF1 control
circuit terminal)
Analog input
(IRF/VRF2 control
circuit terminal)
9
10
Output voltage
Load factor
(Percentage in terms
of rated current)
11
Detected speed
(optional)
Output power
(V/f mode only)
12
Conversion method
120 Hz=10 V
120 Hz=10 V
*1
500 V=5 V
100°C=8 V
100%=5 V
5 V=5 V at 0 to 5 V input
10 V=10 V at 0 to 10 V
input
20 mA=10 V or
5 V=5 V at 0 to 5 V input
10 V=10 V at 0 to 10 V
input
500 V=10 V
100%=5 V
1800 rpm=5 V
10kW=10 V
Note: Maximum allowable current = 15 mA
(The converted values are output voltages
under no load. Since the output voltage
decreases as the output current increases, set
the output coefficient accordingly.)
*1
SBT
SHF
SPF
0.75K/1.5K
1.5K-4.0K 2.2K-5.5K 20A=10V
1.5K/2.2K-3.7K/5.5K 5.5K-11K 7.5K-15K 50A=10V
5.5K/7.5K-11K/15K
15K-22K 18.5K-30K 100A=10V
15K/18.5K-22K/30K
250A=10V
75K-110K 90K-132K 500A=10V
132K-220K 160K-280K 750A=10V
250K
315K
1000A=10V
Direction of Rotation of Motor
(Operation Panel)
z This function is used to assign the direction of
rotation to the
Cd130=1:
Cd130=2:
key on the operation panel.
Forward run
Reverse run
Note: The direction of rotation of the motor is fixed by
Cd050.
Note: If the coefficients of Cd127 and Cd129 are smaller
than 1, the output signals are decreased.
- 95 -
3.
Shortest Operation Time Function
z Even when a brief operation signal is input via an
external control terminal, this function holds the
operation command for the time set by Cd131.
Cd131 = 0.00 to 99.99 (in step of 0.01 s)
z During operation using signals input to the external
control terminal, the function defines the minimum ON
period for multifunctional input terminal FR or RR. In
other words, the function starts counting when the
input signal turns on, and the signal is assumed to
remain on for the duration of the count even if the
physical signal to the multifunctional input terminal FR
or RR goes off.
After the time set by Cd131, the inverter operates
again according to the current status of multifunctional input terminal FR or RR.
Note 1: If Cd140=2 is executed with no user's initialization
data determined by Cd099=99, “
” is
displayed.
Note 2: Even when not changed intentionally by the user, a
function code whose initialization value differs
depending on the motor and inverter ratings may be
changed from its initialization value if related codes
are changed.
Start Standby Time
Start Standby Frequency
z This function is used to make the frequency increase
halt temporarily until the rotation speed increases
enough and restart the frequency increase with the
output frequency standby function. This allows
smooth acceleration when the inertia of the load is
high.
Cd641=0.0 - 120.0 s:
Start standby time
Cd642=0.05 - 60.00 Hz: Start standby frequency
z When a value other than 0 is set with Cd641, the
inverter locks the frequency for the time set with
Cd641 (output frequency standby) after accelerating
to the frequency set with Cd642.
External
operation signal
FR or RR
Internal
operation signal
of the inverter
The numbers of the function codes that have
been changed are displayed flashing.
For details of the operating procedure, see 7.1,
“Changing Settings”
Shortest
operation time
Cd131
Note 1: If the time setting of Cd131 is changed while the
shortest operation time function is counting the time,
the new value will be valid from the next time.
Note 2: If an external operation signal for motor rotation in
the opposite direction is input when the shortest
operation time function is counting the time, the
shortest operation time does not apply to that
operation command.
Note 1: When the acceleration/deceleration curve is Sshaped (Cd017=2), this function is invalid.
Note 2: If the set standby frequency is higher than the
starting frequency, the inverter stands by at the
starting frequency.
Note 3: The target frequency is lower than the standby
frequency, the standby operation is not performed.
Note 4: The standby operation is not performed during
deceleration.
Changed Code Display Function
z This function compares the factory presets, user's
initialization data, and current function code data and
displays the function codes for which data values are
different.
Cd140=1: Displays discrepancies from the factory
presets.
Cd140=2: Displays discrepancies from the user's
initialization data.
z This function does not display the function codes
Cd084, Cd097, Cd098, Cd099, Cd100, or Cd140 even if
they have been changed.
Operating procedure
1. Execute Cd140=1 to compare the current function
code data with the factory presets to find
function codes that have been changed.
2. “
” keeps flashing while the function is
Target
frequency
Decelerating
Standby
frequency
Cd642
Starting
frequency
Cd010
searching the data for codes that have been
changed.
” disappears.
Wait until “
- 96 -
Accelerating
Standby time
Cd641
Accelerating
Standby time
Cd641
Time
Magnification of frequency counter output
Cooling fan on function
z This function specifies the output magnification when
the output frequency and command frequency of the
inverter are counter output to the control signal
output terminals.
Cd670=1-10 (1 step)
Example 1: Cd670=1 outputs the frequency to the
control signal output terminals at 1 time
the output frequency and command
frequency of the inverter. When the
inverter output frequency is 60 Hz, the
frequency counter output is 60 Hz.
Example 2: Cd670=10 outputs the frequency to the
control signal output terminals at 10 times
the output frequency and command
frequency of the inverter. When the
inverter output frequency is 60 Hz, the
frequency counter output is 600 Hz.
z Refer to 4.2 (6) “Multifunctional output terminals” as
related function.
Cd638-Cd640=32: Frequency counter output
(Output frequency)
Cd638-Cd640=33: Frequency counter output
(Command frequency)
z This function is valid only for the SHF-55K, SPF-75K
and lower models.
z Specify the operation of the cooling fan that cools
radiator fins of the inverter. ON/OFF controls are
performed automatically by fin temperature and
inverter driver conditions when ON/OFF controls are
selected.
Cd671=0: Cooling fan ON/OFF control
Cd671=1: Cooling fan ON normally
Note: When replace the fan, test the operation of the fan
using Cd671=1: Cooling fan ON normally mode.
Missing phase detection function
z This function specifies whether missing phase
detection function is ON or OFF.
Cd672=0: Missing input phase detection is invalid,
missing output phase detection is
invalid.
Cd672=1: Missing input phase detection is valid,
missing output phase detection is
invalid.
Cd672=2: Missing input phase detection is invalid,
missing output phase detection is valid.
Cd672=3: Missing input phase detection is valid,
missing output phase detection is valid.
Note 1: The output range of the frequency counter output is
1-1500 Hz. When the calculated result of the
frequency counter output using magnification of
frequency counter output is lower than 1 Hz, the
frequency counter output is limited to 1 Hz. Also, if
the result is higher than 1500 Hz, the frequency
counter output is limited to 1500 Hz. The control
signal output terminals are set to OFF when the
inverter is stopped.
Note 2: The output frequency is the actual inverter output
frequency. When in the sensorless vector control
mode, the output frequency is different from the
frequency setting and keeps changing depending
on the load condition. When the constant frequency
counter output is required even in constant
operation of sensorless vector control mode, set
Cd638-Cd640=33 (command frequency).
Note 3: The waveform of frequency counter output is
delayed by the size of the connected peripheral
devices’ impedance. This causes an imbalance of
the duty cycle. To reduce the imbalance of the duty
cycle, adjust the connected peripheral devices’
impedance. The open collector output should be 50
mA, 2 kΩ or less.
Note 1: The missing input/output phase detection function is
valid in factory presets. Set the missing phase
detection function invalid when a malfunction is
likely to occur because of peripheral devices or
noises.
Note 2: Alarm display for the missing input phase detected is
“
X .”
Note 3: Alarm display for the missing output phase detected
is “
.”
Overvoltage stalling prevention function
z To prevent an over-voltage trip when in regeneration
during deceleration of the motor, use this overvoltage
stalling prevention function to control gradient of
deceleration.
Cd673=0: Overvoltage stalling prevention function
inactive.
Cd673=1: Overvoltage stalling prevention function
active.
Note: This function is effective when deceleration is
completed within the specified deceleration time.
Since the DC voltage of the inverter is rising, mount a
sufficient number of discharge units.
- 97 -
Relay contact output selection
Optional V/f pattern intermediate voltage 1
z Select functions for outputting relay contacts for
output terminals (FA, FB, FC).
Cd674=
0: Output at alarm status
1: In operation 1
2: Low voltage
3: End of simple scheduled operation
4: In operation 2
5: Frequency matching
(1st speed frequency)
6: Frequency matching
(1st to 8th speed frequencies)
7: Frequency approach
8: Overload alarm level setting
(Cd048 value. Output only in constant
operation.)
9: Electrothermal level signal
(Electrothermal 80%)
10: Fin heat prediction signal
11: Auxiliary pump driving signal (Option)
12: Regular pump switching signal (Option)
13: Excitation and DC braking
14: Lower frequency limit matching
15: Upper frequency limit matching
16: Servo ON-signal (Option)
17: Zero servo completion signal (Option)
18: FR signal 19: RR signal
20: 2DF signal 21: 3DF signal
22: AD2 signal 23: AD3 signal
24: JOG signal 25: MBS signal
26: ES signal 27: RST signal
28: Switching standby signal (Option)
29: Positioning completion signal (Option)
30: Discharge resistor ON-signal
31: Reserved 32: Reserved 33: Reserved
34: Overload alarm signal (Cd048 value.
Output when in operation.)
35 - 99: Reserved
Optional V/f pattern intermediate voltage 2
Optional V/f pattern intermediate frequency 1
Optional V/f pattern intermediate frequency 2
z Optional V/f pattern can be specified when Cd003 = 1,
linear V/f pattern is selected for V/f pattern selection.
z Refer to Cd003: V/f pattern as related functions.
Cd675=0-460 V (1 V step):
Optional V/f pattern intermediate voltage 1
Cd676=0-460 V (1 V step):
Optional V/f pattern intermediate voltage 2
Cd677=0.05-600 Hz (0.01 Hz step):
Optional V/f pattern intermediate
frequency 1
Cd678=0.05-600 Hz (0.01 Hz step):
Optional V/f pattern intermediate frequency 2
Feedback signal disconnection detection time
z This function sets the disconnection detection time of
feedback signals to the inverter during various
feedback controls.
z If a feedback signal is disconnected during various
feedback control, control is disabled. The feedback
signal disconnection function detects this status and
outputs an alarm (GAL1) to stop the inverter for
protection.
Set the time for the disconnection detection function
to operate to Cd680.
Cd680=0 to 120 seconds (0.01-second step)
where,
Cd680=0: Disconnection detection time is fixed to 5
seconds
Cd680=120: No disconnection detection function
Note: The factory setting of Cd680 is 5 seconds. If a
feedback signal delays due to the pump load,
disconnection detection may function. In such a
case, set a larger value to Cd680 or correctly
connect the feedback signal, then use this device
with the setting Cd680=120: No disconnection
detection function.
Note 1: Cd674=30: Discharge resistor ON-signal operates
at high speed. Set Cd064: Discharge resistors ONsignal output time 0.2 seconds or more so that the
relay can correspond fully.
Note 2: ON: FA and FC is conducted. OFF: FB and FC is
conducted.
- 98 -
7.4
7.4.1
Serial Communication Function
Outline
z The serial communication function is an interface function that controls the inverter using serial signals
from a computer. This function controls inverter start/stop, frequency setting, operation status monitoring,
and function code reading and setting.
z The inverter has an RS232C and an RS485 communication interface. The RS232C interface allows an
ordinary computer with an RS232C interface to be connected directly for easy setting of inverter function
codes. The RS485 interface enables a computer to control up to 32 inverters.
7.4.2
Terminal functions and wiring
(1) Terminal functions
1) RS485 communication interface (Control circuit terminal TB10)
(1-to-N connection)
Terminal symbol
TRA
TRB
RXR
Terminal name
Send-receive
data terminal (+)
Send-receive
data terminal (–)
Terminating
terminal
Function
Use the positive signal terminal (+) to connect a
computer via the RS485 interface.
Use the negative signal terminal (-) to connect a
computer via the RS485 interface.
When connecting several inverters to a computer via
the RS485 interface, connect the TRB and RXR
terminals of the last inverter together.
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
Cd147=1 (1st)
RS485 communication
interface
TRA
TRB
TB10
Cd147=N (Nth)
TRA
TRB
RXR
TB10
- 99 -
Note: Connect TRB and
RXR of the last
inverter.
2) RS232C communication interface (Serial port on the control board)
(1-to-1 connection)
Connect the serial port of the inverter control board and the serial port of the personal computer
using a commercial serial cross cable of 5 meters or less with 9-pin female D-subconnectors as
follows:
Inch screw
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Frame
Female
Inverter side
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Frame
Shield
9-pin D-sub female cross cable (inverter side: female inch screw)
7.4.3
Inverter operation and function code setting by serial communication
(1) Enabling or disabling serial communication
Cd146 setting Operator
Function code
Reference
Set
Serial communication
Operation
Start
Stop
Frequency
Display
0
Enabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
*1
Enabled
Enabled
*1 Set Cd001=3 for operation by serial communication.
*2 Set Cd002=14 for frequency setting by serial communication.
- 100 -
Description
Set
Enabled
*2
Serial communication
cannot be used.
Operation panel can be
used at the same time.
(2) Setting function codes related to the computer and serial communication
Code
Cd142
Cd143
Cd144
Cd146
Cd147
Cd148
Cd149
Cd150
Cd151
Cd152
Description
Message checksum
Select whether to add a checksum to a communication message.
0: No
1: Yes (Factory preset)
RS232C/485
Select a communication protocol.
1: RS232C (Factory preset)
2: RS485
Pull-up/down
Select pull-up/down for the RS485 communication circuit.
0: No (Factory preset)
1: Yes
Communication function
Select a communication function
0: No function (Factory preset)
1: Serial communication function
Inverter number
Set a value from 1 to 32. Be careful not to set the same number as another inverter. (Factory
preset)
Notes: 1. If the same number is set, the function may not work normally.
2. The inverters need not be numbered sequentially. A missing number is acceptable.
Communication speed
1: 1200 bps
2: 2400 bps
3: 4800 bps (Factory preset)
4: 9600 bps
5: 19200 bps
Parity bit
0: None
1: Odd (Factory preset)
2: Even
Stop bit
1: 1 bit (Factory preset)
2: 2 bits
End bit
0: CR, LF (Factory preset)
1: CR
Inverter’s response to specified commands
0: Sent (factory preset)
1: Not sent (Error response sent)
2: Not sent (Error response not sent)
Notes:
1. Do not set or change a communication-related function code during communication. Communication
may not work normally if a function code is set or changed during communication.
2. Set the output of the RS485 communication interface to high impedance when not used for data
transmission. To prevent unstable output or malfunctioning, the computer may have a fail-safe circuit
that keeps the RS485 communication interface circuit at low impedance by pulling output signals up
or down.
If your computer does not have this fail-safe circuit built-in, set the pull-up/down function code
(Cd144=1).
- 101 -
RS485 interface circuit
in the computer
RS485 receiving circuit
Pull-down resistor
RS485 transmitting circuit
Pull-up resistor
+
GND
RS485 transmission line
Terminating
resistor
- 102 -
7.4.4
Serial communication functions
(1) Command list
Command type
Data read
Data write
Start/stop/reset
Automatic alarm
Batch operation
Error
Command
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
T
N
O
P
Q
R
S
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
?
Processing
Alarm contents
Function code data
Output frequency
Output current
DC link voltage
Fin temperature
Load factor
(electro thermal integrated value)
Operation status 1
Operation status 2
Terminal control board input status
Output voltage
VRF1 control circuit terminal input
IRF/VRF2 control circuit terminal input
Load factor (Ratio of rated current)
Function code data
Frequency setting
Forward run
Reverse run
Stop
Alarm reset
Automatic alarm permitted
Automatic alarm prohibited
Automatic alarm
Select inverters for batch control
Specify direction of rotation for batch
inverter control
Release batch inverter control
Batch start
Batch stop
Error response
Remarks
Setting permitted when Cd001=3
Setting permitted when Cd001=3
Setting permitted when Cd001=3
(2) Frequency Setting command
z The Frequency Setting (O) command provides a function for setting the frequency from a computer,
equivalent to directly setting the frequency from the operation panel. The set frequency is written
into an appropriate frequency-related function code (Cd028 to Cd036) depending on the status of
signal input into the control circuit terminals (2DF, 3DF, and JOG) at that time.
Example: If control circuit terminals 2DF and DCM1 are connected when the inverter has received
command O, the set frequency is written to function code Cd030 as the 2nd speed frequency.
Note: Set Cd002=14 before setting a frequency using command O or writing data to a frequencyrelated function code (Cd028 to Cd036) using the Function Code Data Write (N) command.
- 103 -
(3) Batch operation function
z The batch operation function allows selected inverters or all inverters connected through a communication line to be started and stopped simultaneously from a computer.
1) Batch operation of selected inverters
1 Select inverters for batch operation using command a.
2 Specify the direction of rotation using command b.
3 Transmit command d with “inverter number 33” to simultaneously start the inverters selected
using command a. The inverters return no response to command d.
4 Transmit command e with “inverter number 33” to simultaneously stop the inverters selected
using command a. The inverters return no response to command e.
2) Batch operation of all connected inverters
1 Specify the direction of rotation using command b.
2 Transmit Command d with “inverter number 34” to simultaneously start all the connected
inverters. The inverters return no response to command d.
3 Transmit command e with “inverter number 34” to simultaneously stop all the connected
inverters. The inverters return no response to command e.
3) Release of batch operation
1 Transmit command c with “inverter number 35” to release the inverters selected using command a from batch control.
Notes:
During batch operation, keep in mind the following:
1) Inverters return no response to command c, d, or e.
2) If command c, d, or e sent from a computer is not received normally for some reason, the
connected inverter cannot execute the command. Therefore, the computer should transmit
an Operation Status 1 (H) command to each inverter to see that the inverter is now executing
the received command correctly.
3) For the meanings of inverter numbers 33, 34, and 35, see “(1) Message formats” in 7.4.5.
Different numbers from 1 to 32 are given to inverters connected using a communication line
to identify them as message destinations. “33” to “35” are special inverter numbers indicating
that the messages are addressed to all inverters connected for batch operation.
- 104 -
(4) Automatic alarm function
z If an alarm occurs, the automatic alarm function automatically issues an Automatic Alarm (Z)
command to notify the computer of the alarm. This function enables the computer to detect an
inverter alarm immediately.
z An inverter can issue command Z automatically only if an Automatic Alarm Permitted (X) command is received from the computer. However, if the Automatic Alarm Prohibited (Y) command is
received after command X, the inverter cannot issue command Z.
Note: If automatic alarm is enabled, the inverter automatically issues an Automatic Alarm command
in the event of an alarm. Consequently, message collision may occur on a communication line.
The causes of message collision and preventive actions are as follows:
(1) If the computer transmits a command to an inverter and another inverter in which an alarm
has occurred issues command Z simultaneously
1
The computer detects the message collision. Transmit the messages again.
2
If the computer cannot detect the message collision, the messages cannot be
conveyed to their destination incorrectly. Therefore, a normal response from the
destination cannot be expected.
(2) If an alarm occurs simultaneously in several inverters permitted to issue command Z
1
Since a message collision destroys the messages, the computer receives an
abnormal message. Discard the abnormal message received by the computer.
2
An inverter has a function to detect the collision of a transmitted message. If a
message collision is detected, the inverter automatically transmits the message
again.
Reference: If simultaneous message transmissions from several inverters cause a message collision,
the inverters transmit the messages in ascending order of inverter number set by Cd147.
z An alarm permitted inverter automatically issues command Z about every two seconds in case of an
error. This automatic transmission stops if an Alarm Read (A) command is received. If command Z
is received, the computer must transmit command A immediately to the inverter issuing command Z.
Note: If command A is received, the inverter issuing command Z stops automatic alarm transmission.
Command Z cannot be issued again even if the cause of the alarm has not yet been solved
(ex. the fin temperature is high and the fin overheat protection function has activated) or the
alarm status has not been reset.
(5) Reading alarm data (Cd098)
z By using function code Cd098, the last five alarms can be read in chronological order. The procedure for reading the alarms is as follows:
1 Write 1 to Cd098 using command N.
2 Transmit a Function Code Data Read (B) command to Cd098. The alarm numbers of past
alarms if any are read. See list of alarm codes for details of the alarm numbers.
3 Transmit command B to Cd098. Once all the stored alarm numbers have been returned,
“∆END∆” is returned.
∆ represents a blank space code (20H).
Note: Execute step 2 immediately after step
alarms can no longer be read by 2 .
1
. If a command other than B is transmitted after
- 105 -
1
, the
7.4.5
Programming
(1) Message formats
z Messages have the following two formats:
1 ASCII format: Consisting of character codes only
2 Binary format: Consisting of an inverter number and data in hexadecimal
Since a binary-format message is shorter than an ASCII-format message, the communication
time for one message is shorter. This format is available only for the Frequency Setting (O),
Forward Run (P), Reverse Run (Q), Stop (R), and Alarm Reset (S) commands.
If the message check function is disabled (Cd142=0), “SUM” is not necessary for messages in the
ASCII or binary format.
1) Message from computer to inverter (ASCII format)
1
HD
2
3
IN
4
5
OP
DT
Fixed
length
1
Item
HD
Name
Start code
2 3
IN
Inverter number
4
OP
Command code
5
OP
Data
6
7
8
SUM EM
Variable
length
Description
Message transmission start code (*: ASCII code 2AH)
Destination inverter number (Data length: 2 bytes fixed)
This data is set by function code Cd147.
2 → “2”, 3 → “0”,
Example: Inverter number 20
Inverter command code
Example: Function code data read/write contents
1) Function code number section (Data length: 3 bytes fixed)
Example: Code number Cd031
(1) → “0” (2) → “3” (3) → “1”
2) Function code data section (Data length: 5 bytes fixed)
Example: Code data 123
(4) → “0” (5) → “0” (6) →“1”
(7) → “2” (8) → “3”
(1)
(2)
(3)
Code number
6
SUM
Checksum
7 8
EM
End code
or
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Code data
• The data length and format are determined for each command. For
details, see Details of message formats.
Obtain the two’s complement of the lowest byte of the binary sum of
data 1 to 5 . Change bit 7 to 0 and bit 6 to 1. (See Reference.)
Determine the end code from the data transfer end code and function
code Cd151. ASCII codes 0DH (CR) and 0AH (LF) or 0DH (CR)
7
- 106 -
Reference: Setting inverter number 1 to 50.0 Hz using function code Cd029 as an example
of checksum calculation
1
Item
Start code
Item data
2
Inverter number 01
*
(2) 30H .......... “0”
(3) 31H .......... “1”
3
(4) 4EH .......... “N”
(5) 30H .......... “0”
(6) 32H .......... “2”
(7) 39H .......... “9”
5
Data
(8) 30H .......... “0”
(9) 35H .......... “5”
(10) 30H ........ “0”
(11) 30H ........ “0”
(12) 30H ........ “0”
Sum of ASCII codes (1) to (12)
269H Lower byte: 69H
Two’s complement of the lower byte of the sum 97H
6
Change bit 7 to 0 and bit 6 to 1.
97H=10010111B → 01010111B=57H
Checksum: 57H
4
Command code
ASCII code
(1) 2AH ......... “*”
N
Function code
number
Cd029
Function code
data
50.00Hz (†)
†: Frequency data consists of a 3-digit integer part and a 2-digit decimal part.
- 107 -
2) Message from inverter to computer (ASCII format)
1
2
HD
3
IN
4
5
OP
DT
Fixed
length
1
Item
HD
Name
Start code
2 3
IN
Inverter number
4
OP
Command code
5
DT
Data
6
7
8
SUM EM
Variable
length
Description
Message transmission start code (*: ASCII code 2AH)
Destination inverter number (Data length: 2 bytes fixed)
This data is set by function code Cd147.
2 → “2”, 3 → “0”,
Example: Inverter number 20
Same as command code from computer
“?” for error response
Example: Function code data read contents
1) Normally read data is 5 bytes long (fixed).
Example: Data 123
(1) → “0” (2) → “0” (3) → “1”
(4) → “2” (5) → “3”
Example: Normal termination code if no data is read
(1) → “e” (2) → “F” (3) → “F”
(4) → “F” (5) → “0”
2) As an error response, an error code or interference code of 5 bytes
long (fixed) is returned.
(1)
(2)
5
6
SUM
Checksum
7 8
EM
End code
or
(3)
(4)
(5)
Data area
• The data length and format are determined for each command. For
details, see Details of message formats.
Obtain the two’s complement of the lowest byte of the binary sum of
data 1 to 5 . Change bit 7 to 0 and bit 6 to 1.
Determine the end code from the data transfer end code and function
code Cd151. ASCII codes 0DH (CR) and 0AH (LF) or 0DH (CR)
7
The following messages are used for commands N and B for signed function codes:
<Command N> Example 1: When setting +50 Hz with Cd054
The write data (DT) is 0 0 5 0 0 or + 0 5 0 0 .
Example 2: When setting -50 Hz with Cd054
The write data (DT) is – 0 5 0 0 .
<Command B>
Example 3: When +50 Hz is set with Cd054
The read data (DT) is 0 0 5 0 0 .
Example 4: When -50 Hz is set with Cd054
The read data (DT) is – 0 5 0 0
- 108 -
.
3) Message from computer to inverter (Binary format)
1
2
3
4
5
6
HD IN OP DT SUM
2
Item
HD
IN
Name
Start code
Inverter number
3
OP
Command code
DT
Setting data
SUM
Checksum
1
4
5
6
Description
Message transmission start code (“@”: ASCII code 40H)
Destination inverter number
Example: 14H for Inverter number 20
Inverter command code
Send data to inverter
Example: Data 123
4 → 00H 5 → 78H “1”
* This is added only to a command code when there is applicable setting
data.
Add the two’s complement of the lower byte of the binary sum of data
1 to 5 . (See Reference.)
Reference: Setting Inverter number 1 to 50.0 Hz as an example of checksum calculation
1 Start code = 40H:
“@”
2 Inverter number = 01H:
3 Command code = 4FH:
“O”
4 Data (upper byte) = 13H:
50.00 Hz → 5000D → 1388H
5 Data (lower byte) = 88H:
6 Sum of 1 to 5 = 12BH:
40H + 01H + 4FH + 13H + 88H = 12BH
6 Lower byte of 12BH = 2BH:
6 Two’s complement of 2BH = D5H: Checksum
4) Message from inverter to computer (Binary format)
1
2
3
4
5
HD IN OP ST SUM
2
Item
HD
IN
Name
Start code
Inverter number
3
OP
Command code
4
ST
6
SUM
Command status
code
Checksum
1
Description
Message transmission start code (“@”: ASCII code 40H)
Destination inverter number
2 → “2”, 3 → “0”
Example: Inverter number 20
Same as command code from computer
“?” for error response
Define this code for each command.
See Details of message formats-Binary format for details.
Add the two’s complement of the lower byte of the binary sum of data
to 4 .
- 109 -
1
(2) Details of message formats
1) ASCII-format message
OP-CD
A
Example of communication data (inverter number 1)
Transmission from computer to inverter
Transmission from inverter to computer
• Reading the alarm number
• External thermal alarm (18)
* 0 1 A 0 0 0 1 8 SUM EM
* 0 1 A SUM EM
• The response is 0 if no alarm is detected.
• See list of alarm codes for details of the alarm
numbers.
• Cd007: 60 [Hz]
• Reading the function code data (*1)
• Cd007 “Upper frequency limit”
* 0 1 B 0 6 0 0 0 SUM EM
* 0 1 B 0 0 7 SUM EM
• The read data is a fixed floating-point value of
the same format as the display on the operation
panel of the inverter.
• If a read error occurs, “eXXXX” is returned as
an error code.
See list of alarm codes for details of the error
codes.
• See “Note” for the read data format of Cd053
(Number of poles, voltage, and
capacity of motor).
• Output frequency: 50 [Hz]
B
C
D
E
F
G
• Reading the output frequency
* 0 1 C SUM EM
* 0 1 C 0 5 0 0 0 SUM EM
• The frequency data is multiplied by 100.
• Output current: 12 [A]
• Reading the output current
* 0 1 D SUM EM
* 0 1 D 0 0 1 2 0 SUM EM
• The current data is multiplied by 10.
• DC voltage: 150 [V]
• Reading the DC voltage
* 0 1 E SUM EM
* 0 1 E 0 1 5 0 0 SUM EM
• The voltage data is multiplied by 10.
• Fin temperature: 50 [°C]
• Reading the fin temperature
* 0 1 F SUM EM
* 0 1 F 0 0 0 5 0 SUM EM
• The fin temperature data is multiplied by 1.
• Load factor: 40 [%]
• Reading the load factor
* 0 1 G SUM EM
* 0 1 G 0 0 0 4 0 SUM EM
• The load factor data is multiplied by 1.
• The operation status is returned as bit data.
• Reading Operation Status 1
H
* 0 1 H SUM EM
* 0 1 H 0 0 0 0 X SUM EM
• The data has a one-byte format.
• See Operation Status 1 data for the bit correspondence of data X.
*1: Do not read using a code number not listed in the function code table, otherwise the data returned by the
inverter is undefined.
- 110 -
OP-CD
I
Example of communication data (inverter number 1)
Transmission from computer to inverter
Transmission from inverter to computer
• Reading Operation Status 2
• The operation status is returned as bit data.
* 0 1 I 0 X X X X SUM EM
* 0 1 I SUM EM
• The data has a four-byte format.
• See Operation Status 2 data for the bit correspondence of data X.
• The terminal status is returned as bit data.
• Reading the input status of the control
terminal board
J
* 0 1 J 0 X X X X SUM EM
* 0 1 J SUM EM
• The data has a four-byte format.
• See Control Terminal Board Input Status data
for the bit correspondence of data X.
• Output voltage: 100 [V]
• Reading the output voltage
K
* 0 1 K SUM EM
* 0 1 K 0 1 0 0 0 SUM EM
• The voltage data is multiplied by 10.
• The VRF1 control terminal input value is
returned.
• VRF1 control terminal input value
L
* 0 1 L SUM EM
* 0 1 L 0 1 0 2 3 SUM EM
• Up to 1023 (10 bits) are returned for the
maximum input (10 V).
• The IRF/VRF2 control terminal input value is
returned.
• IRF/VRF2 control terminal input value
M
* 0 1 M SUM EM
* 0 1 M 0 1 0 2 3 SUM EM
• Writing the function code data
• Writing 50 Hz to Cd008 “Lower frequency
limit”
* 0 1 N 0 0 8 0 5 0 0 0 SUM EM
• Set the frequency data multiplied by 100.
• Up to 1023 (10 bits) are returned for the
maximum input (10 V or 20 mA).
Note: Switch between IRF and VRF2 with Cd002.
• Normal write
* 0 1 N e F F F 0 SUM EM
• Interference error (Example: Interference with
Cd007)
* 0 1 N e 0 0 0 7 SUM EM
Interference code number
N
• Setting error (Example: Locked)
* 0 1 N e F F F 5 SUM EM
Error code
• See Chapter _ for details of the error codes.
• See “Note” for the write data format of Cd053
(Number of poles, voltage, and capacity of
motor).
• Same as for code data write
• Setting the output frequency
• Setting the output frequency to 55 Hz
O
* 0 1 O e F F F 0 SUM EM
* 0 1 O 0 5 5 0 0 SUM EM
• Set the frequency data multiplied by 100.
- 111 -
Error code (Example: 0 Hz)
• “eFFFA” is returned if the frequency setting is
not permitted.
OP-CD
P
Q
R
S
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
Example of communication data (inverter number 1)
Transmission from computer to inverter
Transmission from inverter to computer
• Forward run command
• Transmission from inverter to computer
* 0 1 P SUM EM
* 0 1 OP ST SUM EM
Command execution status
0: Normal
1: Operation control is not
permitted
2: No operation in alarm
status
• Reverse run command
* 0 1 Q SUM EM
• Stop command
* 0 1 R SUM EM
• Alarm Reset command
* 0 1 S SUM EM
* 0 1 S SUM EM
• Automatic Alarm Permitted command
* 0 1 X SUM EM
* 0 1 X SUM EM
• Automatic Alarm Prohibited command
* 0 1 Y SUM EM
* 0 1 Y SUM EM
• Command A is returned if an automatic alarm
is received.
• Selecting inverters for batch operation
• Selecting inverter number 1
• Automatic alarm
* 0 1 Z SUM EM
* 0 1 a ST SUM EM
* 0 1 a SUM EM
• Selecting the direction of rotation of batchoperation inverters
• Selecting forward run for inverter number 1
* 0 1 b 0 SUM EM
↑
Direction of rotation (Forward: 0, Reverse: 1)
• Releasing batch operation
* 3 5 c SUM EM
• Sent with inverter number 35.
- 112 -
Command execution status
0: Normal
1: Operation control is not
permitted
2: No operation in alarm
status
Command repetition
• No response is returned.
• The command is ignored if operation control is
not permitted.
OP-CD
Example of communication data (inverter number 1)
Transmission from computer to inverter
Transmission from inverter to computer
• Batch Start command
• No response is returned.
• The selected inverters are started
• The command is ignored if operation control is
simultaneously.
not permitted.
* 3 3 d SUM EM
d
• Sent with inverter number 33.
• Batch Start command
• The selected inverters are started
simultaneously.
* 3 4 d SUM EM
• Sent with inverter number 34.
• Batch Start command
• The selected inverters are started
simultaneously.
* 3 3 e SUM EM
e
• Sent with inverter number 33.
• Batch Start command
• The selected inverters are started
simultaneously.
* 3 4 e SUM EM
• Sent with inverter number 34.
Note: Read/write data formats of Cd053 (Number of poles, voltage, and capacity of motor)
The Cd053 data format has a 5-digit format.
X Y ZZZ
A B
A
B
C
Number of poles data
Example: 4 poles → 4
Rated voltage data
Set the rated voltage using the corresponding setting number as follows:
Rated voltage
Setting No.
200
1
220
2
230
3
380
4
400
5
415
6
440
7
460
8
Example: 380 V → 4
C
Rated capacity
Set the rated capacity of the motor using the corresponding setting number as
follows:
Rated voltage
Setting No.
Rated voltage
Setting No.
Rated voltage
Setting No.
Rated voltage
Setting No.
0.37
1
3.7
9
30.0
17
160
25
0.40
2
4.0
10
37.0
18
200
26
- 113 -
0.55
3
5.5
11
45.0
19
220
27
0.75
4
7.5
12
55.0
20
250
28
1.1
5
11.0
13
75.0
21
280
29
1.5
6
15.0
14
90.0
22
315
30
2.2
7
18.5
15
110
23
3.0
8
22.0
16
132
24
Example: Writing 4.0 kW → 010 or _10
Reading 4.0 kW → _10
Where, “_” is ASCII code 5FH
2)
OP-CD
O
P
Q
R
S
Binary format
Note: A binary-format message can be transmitted for the following commands only.
Example of communication data (inverter number 1)
Transmission from computer to inverter
Transmission from inverter to computer
• Setting the output frequency
• Setting the output frequency to 55 Hz
“@” 01H “O” ST SUM
“@” 01H “O” 15H
7CH SUM
• “ST” returns the contents of the error code.
• Set the frequency data by a multiple of 100.
• Forward run command
“@” 01H “P”
“@” 01H “P” SUM
ST
SUM
Command execution
status
0: Normal termination
1: Abnormal termination or operation
control not permitted
• Reverse run command
“@” 01H “Q” SUM
• Stop command
“@” 01H “R” SUM
Command repetition
• Alarm Reset command
“@” 01H “S” SUM
“@” 01H “S” SUM
- 114 -
(3) Inverter operation and control terminal board input status data
z Data read by the Operation Status 1 (H), Operation Status 2 (I), and Control Terminal Board Input
Status (J) commands is as follows:
1) Operation Status 1
Operation Status 1 data is returned in one byte.
0 1 X X X X X X
bit3 - 0
Bit position
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
Stage 6
Stage 7
Stage 8
JOG
Analog
Option
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
3
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Current number of stages in multi-speed operation
Jog operation
Operation by external analog frequency command
Operation by frequency command from the digital
input board (optional)
0: No warning
1: Warning
0: No alarm
1: Alarm
2) Operation Status 2
Operation Status 2 data is returned in four bytes.
• Byte 1
0 1 0 0
V slowing down
During DC braking
During braking excitation
During starting excitation
• Byte 2
0 1 0 0
Decelerating to stop
Raising frequency
Lowering frequency
Matching frequency
- 115 -
• Byte 3
0 1 0 0
Matching deceleration
Reverse run (See Note)
Gate ON
Frequency locked
• Byte 4
0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Standby
Note: The Reverse Run bit remains 1 even when the inverter stops after reverse
run. If it is necessary to confirm forward or reverse run, also check the Gate
ON bit status.
3) Control Terminal Board Input Status
Input status data is returned in four bytes.
• Byte 1
0 1 0 0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
• Byte 2
0 1 0 0
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
• Byte 3
0 1 0 0
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
• Byte 4
0 1 0 0
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
- 116 -
(4) Function code setting error codes
ASCII
“e0xxx”
“eFFF0”
“eFFF1”
BIN
F0H
F1H
“eFFF2”
“eFFF3”
“eFFF4”
“eFFF5”
“eFFF9”
“eFFFA”
“eFFFB”
“eFFFC”
“eFFFE”
F2H
F3H
F4H
F5H
F9H
FAH
FBH
FCH
FEH
Meaning
Setting value conflicts with function code number XXX
Normal termination of function code setting
Function code value is out of range, user’s initial value is not determined, or motor constant is not
registered (Cd053)
Function code setting conflicts with mounted optional board
Function code setting conflicts with mounted options
Unable to change function code during inverter operation
Unable to change function code with operation function locked
Unable to change function code during LV
Frequency setting is not permitted: Check the value of Cd002.
Inverter control microcomputer busy: Send the message again.
Reserved
Access to undefined code
ASCII: ASCII-format message communication
BIN: Binary-format message communication
(5) Inverter alarm codes
Alarm
No.
01
Alarm
code
AL5
Alarm
No.
20
Alarm
code
OCPA
02
AL1
Memory abnormality
21
OCPN
03
AL2
System abnormality
22
OCPD
04
OCH
23
ACER
05
OCA
Main switching element thermal
alarm
Overcurrent during acceleration
24
CNER
06
OCN
25
DCER
07
08
09
OCD
OVA
OVN
26
27
28
AL3
AL4
AL9
10
11
OVD
OVP
29
30
AL10
GAL1
12
13
LVA
LVN
31
32
-----
System abnormality
Disconnection of feedback signal
cable
Reserved
Reserved
14
15
16
LVD
OLA
OLN
33
34
35
-------
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
17
18
19
OLD
ES
OH
Overcurrent during constant power
operation
Overcurrent during deceleration
Overvoltage during acceleration
Overvoltage during constant power
operation
Overvoltage during deceleration
Brake resistor protection
overvoltage
Undervoltage during acceleration
Undervoltage during constant
power operation
Undervoltage during deceleration
Overload during acceleration
Overload during constant power
operation
Overload during deceleration
External thermal alarm
Fin temperature abnormality
36
37
PONG
OPEN
Meaning
CPU abnormality
- 117 -
Meaning
Momentary overload during
acceleration
Momentary overload during constant
power operation
Momentary overload during
deceleration
Overload prevention alarm during
acceleration
Overload prevention alarm during
constant power operation
Overload prevention alarm during
deceleration
System abnormality
System abnormality
System abnormality
Power supply abnormality
Missing output phase
(6) Communication error processing by the inverter
z If an error is found in a message from the master computer, the inverter executes the following
processing:
1) ASCII-format message
1 Parity error, SUM error, or undefined command code
The inverter returns an error message with the command code ? and a one-byte communication
error code for DT.
Example: Inverter number 1
* 0 1 ? DT SUM EM
2
3
4
5
6
DT data too long or short, or data cannot be interpreted
The same error processing as (1) is executed if a message where the data is too long or short is
defined for a code, or the received message data cannot be interpreted.
Timeout
The receive status is terminated forcibly if the entire message cannot be received within 150 ms
after its start code. The inverter returns communication error code “d.”
Start code not detected
If data is being received without a correct start code, the above error is reported after a correct
start code is detected.
Communication error code list
p: Parity error
s: SUM error
u: Operation code not defined
d: Data too long or short, or data cannot be interpreted
Other errors
The timeout processing applies to other errors related to message reception from a computer.
The computer returns no response.
2) Binary-format message
If an error is detected in a received message, the inverter returns an error message to the computer
with OP set to ? and ST set to 1 (Binary).
1 Error detection
Parity error, SUM error, undefined command code, or message data too short (receive timeout)
Example: Binary format
@
IN
?
ST
SUM
(7) Message transmission and reception between inverter and computer
1) Basics
1 The serial communication protocol is based on a procedure for an inverter to respond to a
computer command. Whenever a command is received from a computer, the inverter returns a
response. If the computer sends more commands to the inverter without waiting for a response
from the inverter, the inverter may not work normally.
2 Due to an inverter or communication line fault, however, the computer may not be able to
receive a response from the inverter. To prevent the response wait status from locking the
communication protocol, the computer should use a receive timeout of two seconds or longer.
3 The following commands are exceptions:
a) Command Z: The inverter automatically issues this command to notify the computer of an
alarm, whether or not a command is received from the computer.
b) Commands c, d, and e: The inverter can return no responses to these batch control commands.
- 118 -
4
When sending commands c, d, and e with no response from the inverter, the computer should
insert an interval of about 10 ms between commands.
2) Message transmission and receive timings on the RS485 communication interface
The inverter uses an RS485 communication interface with a half-duplex communication line
system. Therefore, the computer should use the timing described below when sending messages to
prevent a collision between computer-sent and inverter-sent messages.
Data on RS485
communication
line
Inverter-sent
message
Computer-sent
message
2
3
4
9
Computer - Inverter
transmission time
(13)(14)
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
11
Inverter - Computer
transmission time
6
5
7
10
13 14
12
1
8
The computer enables the RS485 communication line for message transmission.
The RS485 communication line is enabled but the computer has not started message
transmission yet. Start message transmission as soon as possible after the computer has
enabled the communication line.
The computer is transmitting a message. The transmission should be completed within
150 ms.
The computer has completed message transmission but the communication line is not
disabled yet. Communication line should be disabled within about 5 ms after completing
the transmission.
The computer disables the RS485 communication line.
The computer has not started message transmission yet. The RS485 communication line
is disabled.
The inverter has completed message reception from the master computer but is not
transmitting a message yet.
The inverter enables the RS485 communication line for message transmission.
The RS485 communication line is enabled but the inverter has not started message
transmission yet. The inverter starts transmission about 100 µs to 50 ms after enabling
the communication line.
The inverter is transmitting a message.
The inverter has completed message transmission but the communication line is not
disabled yet. The inverter should disable the communication line within about 100 µs
after completing the transmission.
The inverter disables the RS485 communication line.
Neither the computer nor the inverter is transmitting. Both the computer and the inverter
keep the RS-458 communication line disabled while there is no communication.
Before transmitting the next command to the same inverter, insert an interval of about 10
ms.
3) Message transmission and receive timings on the RS232C communication interface
The inverter uses an RS232C communication interface with a full-duplex communication line
system. However, since the communication program in the inverter does not support full-duplex
communication, messages should be transmitted and received using the same timing as the RS485
communication interface.
- 119 -
4) Inverter’s response to specified commands
To accelerate communication, whether response from the inverter is sent can be selected.
Response from the inverter to the following commands in the ASCII and BINARY communication
formats. Whether an error is returned is also selectable.
Cd152=0: Sent
Cd152=1: Not sent (Error response sent)
Cd152=2: Not sent (Error response not sent)
1
Supported ASCII commands
N, O, P, Q, R, S, a, b
2
Supported BINARY commands
O, P, Q, R, S
(8) Sample program
Example 1)
N88-Basic
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
410
’***************************************************************
’*Sample program for reading the output frequency (BASIC Program Language)
*
’*
Author: SANKEN Electric Co., Ltd.
*
’*
*
’***************************************************************
’
OPEN ’’ COM1:’’ AS #1
’Open the serial communication line
’
TX$=’’ *01C’’
’Set data to be sent to the inverter
TXLEN=LEN(TX$)
’Acquire the send data length (excluding checksum and end code)
’
SUM=0
’Calculate the transmission checksum
FOR I=1 TO TXLEN
SUM=SUM+ASC(MID$ (TX$, I, 1))
NEXT I
SUM=((0-SUM) AND 127) OR 64
’
TX$=TX$+CHR$(SUM)+CHR$(13)+CHR$(10)’Add a checksum and end code (CR+LF) to send data
’
PRINT #1, TX$
’Transmit data to the inverter
’
LINE INPUT #1, RX$
’Data received from the inverter
’
RXLEN=LEN (RX$)
’Acquire the receive data length (excluding end code)
’
SUM=0
’Calculate the received checksum
FOR I=1 TO RXLEN-1
SUM=SUM+ASC(MID$ (RX$, I, 1))
NEXT I
SUM=((0-SUM) AND 127) OR 64
’
IF MID$ (RX$, RXLEN, 1)=CHR$ (SUM) THEN PRINT ’’OK!’’ ELSE PRINT ’’NG!’’
’Check the received checksum
420 ’
430 ’CLOSE #1
’Close the serial communication line
440 END
’Exit the program
- 120 -
Example 2)
Visual Basic
’**************************************************************
’*Sample program for reading the output frequency (Visual Basic 6.0)
*
’*(Example of receiving data from Comm event)
*
’**************************************************************
’Create a new project.
’Select [Project] then [Components] from Visual Basic Toolbar. Check “Microsoft CommControl 6.0” in [Component].
’Place the object “MSComm1” in the form.
’Place the timer “Timer1” object in the form.
Dim i As Integer
Option Explicit
Private Sub Form_Load()
’[Transmit data.]
Dim Tx As String, TxLen As Integer, Sum As Integer
MSComm1.CommPort=1
MSComm1.Settings="4800,o,8,1"
MSComm1.RTHrshild=1
MSComm1.InputLen=0
MSComm1.PortOpen=True
’Select communication port 1
’Specify 4800bps, odd number, data: 8 bits, stop: 1 bite
’Comm Event is generated when receiving 1 character
’Read all input buffer data
’Open communication port
’Interval for receive time out (m sec.)
Tx="*01C"
TxLen=Len( Tx )
Sum=0
For i=1 To TxLen
Sum=Sum+Acs(Mid(Tx, i, 1))
Next i
Sum=((0-Sum)And 127) Or 64
’Set data to be sent to the inverter
’Acquire the send data length (excluding checksum and end code)
Tx=Tx+Chr(Sum)+vbCrLf
’Add a checksum and end code (CR+LF) to send data
Timer1.Enable=True
MSComm1.Output=Tx
’Enable receive time out error detecting timer
’Transmit data to the inverter
Timer1.Interval=1000
End Sub
Private Sub MSComm1_OnComm()
’[Receive data with Comm event receive]
Dim Rx As String, RxLen As Integer,Sum As Integer
Dim Msg As String
If MSComm1.CommEvent<>comEvReceive Then Exit Sub ’Confirm that the data is Comm event
Do
Rx=Rx+MSComm1.Input
’Receive data from the inverter
DoEvents
Loop Until Right(Rx,2)=(Chr(13)& Chr(10))
’Detect end code
Timer1.Enabled=False
’Cancel time out error detecting timer
RxLen=Len(Rx)-2
’Acquire the receive data length (excluding end code)
Sum=0
’Calculate the received checksum
- 121 -
For i=1 To RxLen-1
Sum=Sum+Acs(Mid(Rx, i, 1))
Next i
Sum=((0-Sum)And 127) Or 64
If Mid(Rx, RxLen, 1)=Chr(Sum) Then
’Check the checksum
Mag=Left(Rx, RxLen)
’Received data (including checksum, excluding end code)
Else
Msg="Check Sum NG"
’Display checksum error
End If
MSBox "Received Data="& Msg
MSComm1.PortOpen=False
End
End Sub
’Display received data
’Close communication port
Private Sub Timer1_Timer()
’Receive time out processing
MsBox "Communication Timeout"
End
End Sub
’When the output frequency of the inverter is 20 Hz
’This program displays "*01C02999@" in the message box
’
*: Header 01: Number of the inverter 02000: 20.00 Hz
’
@: Check Sum
(9)
Character code list
- 122 -
8.
Protection Functions
8.1 Warning Status
z This warning status alerts you that the protection function of the inverter has been activated. However,
the inverter keeps on running. If the inverter runs for a long time in this status, the inverter may enter the
alarm status and stop running.
(See Table 8.1 for warning list)
z In the Status Display mode, details of the warning and the status indication alternate on the 7-segment
display when a warning has occurred. When the Status Display mode is not selected, the alternating
display appears on the 7-segment display if the warning is still active after the Status Display mode is
resumed.
z All keys are valid during the warning status because the inverter continues to operate.
Table 8.1 List of warnings
Warning display
Warning
Protection against overvoltage
has been activated
Description
Deceleration time too short
Current limiting during
acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration (deceleration) time too short
Current limiting during
constant power operation
Load too heavy
Output frequency too high
Overload warning
Load too heavy
Inverter will stop unless an action is taken
Overheating of radiator fins
Temperature of the radiator fins is rising. Check the
ambient temperature and operation of the cooling fan.
The warning is issued at a temperature 10°C below the
) (The abnormal
abnormal radiator fin temperature (
radiator fin temperature differs depending upon the output
frequency, output current and other factors)
Overheating of brake resistor
Brake resistor capacity too low. (%ED is small)
Brake resistor stops to prevent heat damage.
Option error
Two mounted option boards are conflicting with each
other.
PID pressure feedback
disconnection
PID pressure feedback is abnormal. Check the feedback
value and the feedback signal.
- 123 -
8.2 Alarm Status
z The alarm status occurs when the protection function stops the inverter (See Table 8.3 for alarm list).
z During alarm status, all values on the 7-sement display (Hz, A, rpm, %, V, MPa) flash indicating the alarm
status.
z When the Status Display mode selected, details of the alarm are indicated on the 7-segment display. If the
Status Display mode is not selected, details of the alarm are indicated on the 7-segment display if the
alarm status continues after the Status Display mode is resumed. Details of the alarm cannot be deleted.
Table 8.2 Key functions during alarm status
Key operation
Functions
Alarm reset key. The alarm can be cleared if the cause of the alarm has been removed. (AL1, AL2, AL3, AL4, AL9 and AL10 cannot be cleared using the stop
key.)
The display can be switched to the Function Code Display mode, even during alarm
status. Using Cd098, data for the last 5 alarms at maximum can be read. This is
useful for investigating the possible causes of the alarm.
CLEAR
DISP
Numeric
keys
Decimal
point keys
Keys valid in the Function Code Display mode
During alarm status, this key does nothing.
- 124 -
Table 8.3 List of alarms
Alarm display
Description
*2
Memory abnormality
*1
System abnormality
*1
System abnormality
Check points
Turn off the power so the CHARGE
lamp turns off, turn the power on
again and check the alarm.
Excessive external electrical noise?
Are signal and power lines separated far enough?
Actions
Contact your supplier.
Abrupt capacitor discharge?
Turn off the power so the CHARGE
lamp turns off, turn the power on
again and check the alarm.
Reconfirm the modified code data.
Turn the power on and off several
times. If the alarm cannot be cancelled,
reset the system using Cd099=1 and
then turn the power off and on again.
All the function data is initialized to
the factory presets.
Excessive external electrical noise?
Are signal and power lines separated far enough?
Attach absorber and noise filter.
Separate signal lines from power lines.
Turn off the power so the CHARGE
lamp turns off, turn the power on
again and check the alarm.
Contact your supplier.
Current limit value: Setting for
Cd043 too low?
Increase the set value.
Increase acceleration and deceleration
time.
External thermal alarm
Motor overheated?
Reduce the load.
Fin temperature
abnormality
Undervoltage during
acceleration
Fan stopped?
Ambient temperature too high?
Check fan operation.
Increase the ventilation.
Does power supply satisfy conditions?
Has the voltage dropped?
Any phase failure?
Examine/improve power supply
conditions.
Main switching device
temperature abnormality
Fan stopped?
Ambient temperature too high?
Check fan operation.
Increase the ventilation.
*3
Overcurrent during
acceleration
Abrupt acceleration/deceleration
rate?
Increase acceleration and deceleration
time.
*3
Overcurrent during
constant power operation
*3
Overcurrent during
deceleration
Output short-circuited or ground
fault?
Main switching device abnormality?
Correct the short-circuit or ground
fault.
Contact your supplier.
Excessive acceleration rate?
Current limit value: Setting for
Cd043 too high?
Increase the acceleration time.
Decrease the set value.
*2
System abnormality
*2
System abnormality
*2
System abnormality
System abnormality
Overload prevention
alarm during acceleration
Overload prevention
alarm during constant
power operation
Overload prevention
alarm during deceleration
Undervoltage during
constant power operation
Undervoltage during
deceleration
Momentary overload
during acceleration
- 125 -
Alarm display
Description
Check points
Actions
Momentary overload
during constant power
operation
Abrupt change (increase) in load?
Current limit value: Setting for
Cd043 too high?
Eliminate the abrupt change in load.
Decrease the set value.
Momentary overload
during deceleration
Excessive deceleration rate with a
large GD2?
Current limit value: Setting for
Cd043 too high?
Increase the deceleration time.
Decrease the set value.
Motor operated with an excessive
load?
Electrothermal level set properly?
GD2 of the load excessive?
Reduce the load.
Increase the capacity of the inverter
and motor.
Did start-up occur during free run?
Flying start.
Overvoltage during
constant power operation
Is motor being turned by other
force?
Redesign the system so that the motor
is not driven by external force.
Use a brake resistor with a large
capacity.
Overvoltage during
deceleration
Excessive deceleration?
Brake resistor protection overvoltage
Braking frequency too high?
Overload during
acceleration
Overload during
constant power operation
Overload during
deceleration
Overvoltage during
acceleration
Missing output phase
(This is not detected
with ultra low frequency
such as a few Hz)
Disconnection of
feedback signal cable
detected during PID
control of Cd071=3.
*2
Power supply abnormality
Increase the deceleration time (so that
GD2 of the load is met).
Reduce the braking frequency.
Increase the brake resistor capacity.
Check whether any of the output
cables of the inverter has a missing
phase.
Connect the output cables securely to
the inverter.
Feedback signal cable disconnected?
Feedback signal correct?
Cd055: gain frequency correct?
Connect the feedback cables securely.
Set Cd055:gain frequency properly.
+24 V power supply output from
the control circuit overloaded or
shorted?
Check the +24V power supply for
overload.
*1 Since all function data is initialized to the factory presets, settings will need to be input again.
*2 If alarm is displayed again after turning the power on again, contact the retailer.
*3 Even through a protective function against short-circuiting of the main switching device is installed,
repeated short-circuiting may cause deterioration of devices and lead to damage to the inverter. After
removing the cause of the problem, check safety before restarting operation.
Note: If the display on the operation panel goes out for some reason, turn off power to the inverter
to check the wiring, and turn the power on after CHARGE lamp has gone out. (for example,
after accidentally short-circuiting 24V power supply)
- 126 -
8.3 Protection Operations
Table 8.4 List of protection operations
Protection functions
Overcurrent limiting
(Anti-breakdown)
Description
When the current exceeds the value set by Cd043, the frequency curves are
adjusted to limit the increase in current.
Acceleration:
After the output current reaches the setting for Cd043 during acceleration,
the frequency increases at a slower rate for a while to accelerate the motor
within the current limit, preventing breakdown from occurring.
Constant power operation:
When the output current reaches the setting for Cd043 due to an overload
during constant power operation, the frequency is reduced to keep the
output current below the setting. When the overload is removed, the
frequency returns to its previous setting.
Overload prevention
When the energy regenerated during deceleration of the motor exceeds the
dissipation capacity of the brake resistor, raising the DC voltage of the inverter,
the drive frequency stops decreasing and actually increases as necessary to
prevent an over-voltage trip. After the regenerated energy decreases, deceleration is continued at a slower rate.
Overcurrent shutdown
When a current exceeding the allowable current range of the inverter is input,
the protection circuit activates and stops the inverter.
Overvoltage shutdown
When the inverter-DC link voltage exceeds the specified voltage due to excessive regenerated energy, a protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter.
Protection against
undervoltage (momentary power failure)
When the DC voltage falls below the specified value due to an abnormal power
supply voltage, the inverter stops operating.
Overload shutdown
(motor electrothermal
protector)
Overloading and overheating of the motor during low speed operation are
detected by the electrothermal protector to stop the inverter. Different values
can be specified to trip electrothermal protector depending on the type, rated
current, etc. of the motor.
Overload shutdown
(inverter thermal
protector)
The inverter stops operating when a current greater than the current rating of
the inverter flows for one second or longer.
Protection against
radiator fin overheat
Warning (
) is issued at a temperature 10°C below the abnormal radiator
fin temperature (
) when the ambient temperature rises sharply or the
cooling fan stops. If it continues to rise further and exceeds the abnormal
radiator fin temperature (
), the protection function stops the motor drive.
(The abnormal radiator fin temperature (
) differs depending upon the
output frequency and output current.) This function also stops the drive when
the main switching device (power module) is overheating. This function is
released when the temperature decreases to more than 10°C below the abnormal radiator fin temperature (
).
- 127 -
Indication
Table 8.4 List of protection operations
Protection functions
Brake resistor overheating protection
Description
As the regenerative energy of the motor increases, and the allowable brake
resistor value (%ED) is exceeded, the brake resistor becomes temporarily
unusable due to overheating protection. By letting the brake resistor cool down,
it becomes usable again.
Overload prevention
alarm
The inverter stops operating if the motor is unable to accelerate or decelerate
because the motor load is excessive or the setting of Cd043 (output current
limiting function) is too low.
External thermal
protection
An external thermal protector can be attached to a motor. By inputting this
signal to the ES control signal terminal, the inverter can be set to stop when the
thermal protector is activated.
CPU abnormality
If excessive external electrical noise or other disturbances lead to a malfunction
of the CPU, connection failure of an option board, or internal memory abnormality, the inverter stops operating.
- 128 -
Indication
|
9.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Motor does not
rotate
Check Points
Main circuit
• Voltages at terminals R, S, T normal?
• Is the motor wired correctly?
Load
• Load too heavy?
• Motor locked?
Operation
panel
• Starting frequency setting too high (Cd010)?
• Operation start frequency setting too high (Cd011)?
• Is operation command selected for control by external signal
(Cd001=2)?
• Upper frequency limit set too low (Cd007)?
• Check if no setting is specified for the direction of rotation of motor
(Cd050)?
Input signal
• Are operation signals (FR, RR) being input?
• Make sure that signals FR and RR are not being input at the same
time.
• Make sure that free run stop signal (MBS) is not being input.
• Make sure that the analog signal for frequency setting is not zero.
Rotation direction
different from what
it should be
• Wrong wiring of output terminals U, V and W?
• Is the wiring for forward and reverse run mixed up?
Rotation speed does
not increase
• Maker sure that the upper frequency limit function (Cd007) is not activated.
• Make sure that output current limiting
Is setting of Cd043 too low?
function is not activated.
Torque boost (Cd004) too high?
• Load too heavy?
Rotation is not
constant
• Load fluctuating?
• Frequency setting (analog) signal fluctuating?
• Are the capacity and no. of poles appropriate for the inverter capacity specified for
use in the sensorless vector control mode?
Acceleration/
deceleration is not
constant
• Acceleration/deceleration time too short?
• Make sure that output current limiting function is not activated.
• Load too heavy?
Motor heating up
• Wrong setting for V/f pattern?
• Torque boost too high?
Rotation speed
changes abnormally
during operation
• Is the load fluctuating?
• Make sure that output current limiting function is not activated.
Is setting of Cd043 too low?
- 129 -
10. Maintenance and Inspection
This product must only be serviced by a qualified engineer.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in injury or fire.
Careful checking and maintenance are essential to ensure that the
inverter operates correctly with a long service life.
general-purpose
10.1 Precautions on Checking and Maintenance
z This product must only be serviced by a qualified engineer.
z Capacitors retain a high voltage charge for a while after the power is turned off. Make sure that the
CHARGE lamp on the PCB goes out before working on this product. Then check using a circuit tester
to see that the voltage across terminals X and P is lower than 30 VDC.
10.2 Basic Inspection Items
z The motor works as expected;
z The cooling system is free from any problems (such as abnormal heating);
z There is no abnormality at the location of installation; and
z There is no abnormal vibration or noise.
Inspection must be carried out following the periodic inspection list described in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1 Periodic inspection list
Inspection item
Inspection details
General Ambient
· Ambient temperature, relative
environment humidity
· Confirm operating environment
Power supply · Power supply voltage of the
voltage
inverter is normal.
Appearance
and structural
parts
Main
circuit
General
Connection
conductors
and wires.
Main module
(main switching
element)
Terminal board
Main
electrolytic
capacitor
Relay
magnetic
contactor
Method and measuring instrument
Criteria
· Visual inspection:
· Satisfy standard specifications.
Use measuring instrument.
· Use thermometer and hygrometer.
· Measure interphase voltage of R, · Satisfy standard specifications of
S, T power input terminals.
input.
· Use tester and multimeter.
· There is no abnormal vibration or · Tighten bolts.
· There is no abnormality.
or noise.
· Visual inspection
· There is no loosening of bolts.
· There is no deformations or
breakage.
· There is no adhesion of dust or dirt.
· Megger check
· Tighten bolts.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no deformations or dirt. · Visual inspection
· There is no adhesion of dust or dirt.
· There is no distortion or dirt on · Visual inspection
· There is no abnormality.
conductors
· There is no discoloration because
of overheating.
· Check resistance between
· Disconnect the main wiring of the Refer to Table 10.2 Main circuit
terminals.
inverter and measure each terminal power module checklist.
with tester (1 range)
· Use analog tester.
· There is no burning or breakage. · Visual inspection
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no liquid leaks.
· Visual inspection
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no loosening of safety
· Measure with capacity meter
· More than 85% of rated capacity.
valves.
· Measure electrical capacitance.
· There is no chatter during
· Visual and hearing inspection
· There is no abnormality.
operation.
· There is no rough surface on
the contact.
· There is no abnormal noise when
the switch is ON.
- 130 -
Inspection item
Main
Resistor
circuit
Inspection details
Method and measuring instrument
· Check if there is no disconnection. · Odor and visual inspection
· There is no odors or cracks because · Remove one-side and check with tester.
of overheating.
· Use tester and multimeter.
Transformer · There is no abnormal beat sound · Odor, visual and hearing inspection
or odor.
Control Connector
· There is no loosening of
· Visual inspection
circuit
connectors.
display
· There is no cracks, breakage or
deformation.
Capacitor
· There is no liquid leaks, breakage · Visual inspection
or deformation.
Board
· There is no discoloration or dirt. · Visual inspection
Display
· There is no break in the LCD
· Visual inspection
lamp of operation panel
· There is no abnormality in key
operation.
Cooling Fan
· There is no abnormal vibrations · Visual and hearing inspection
system
or noise.
· Tighten bolts, wiring and
· There is no “OH” alarm status.
connectors.
· There is no loosening of bolts,
wiring or connectors.
Ventilation · There is no blockage in cooling
· Visual inspection
flue
fan inlet and outlet or
contaminationor adhesion of
foreign objects.
Fin
· There is no abnormal heating.
· Tactile inspection. Check the
temperature.
· Use the thermometer.
Motor General
· There is no abnormal vibration
· Visual and hearing inspection
or noise.
Insulation
· Megger check
· Disconnect the inverter output wiring
resistance
U, V, and W.
· Use megger tester.
Criteria
· There is no abnormality.
· Less than ±10% of indicated
resistance value.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· Check that the lamp lights up.
· Check key operations.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· There is no abnormality.
· More than 5 M Ω.
Table 10.2 Main circuit power module checklist
Input/Output
Input (R, S, T)
Output (U, V, W)
Terminals
Tester +
Tester P
R, S, T
R, S, T
P
X
R, S, T
R, S, T
X
P
U, V, W
U, V, W
P
X
U, V, W
U, V, W
X
- 131 -
Measured value
Conducted
Not conducted
Not conducted
Conducted
Conducted
Not conducted
Not conducted
Conducted
10.3 Megger Test
z When performing a megger test on the motor and the sequential circuit, be careful not to apply the test
voltage to the inverter.
z For the inverter itself, perform the megger test only on the main circuit as shown below. Do not conduct a
megger test on the control circuit.
Megger test
Motor
Power
supply
R
S
T
U
V
W
IM
Megger
Grounding
Use a circuit tester (high resistance range) for continuity testing of the control circuit.
Do not use a megger or buzzer.
10.4 Part Replacement
z The bearings of the cooling fan usually have a service life of between 10,000-35,000 hours. In a system
that is continually operated, therefore, the bearings must be replaced every 2nd or 3rd year together with
the cooling fan. Run the fan using the Cd097 function. If any abnormal vibration or sound is detected
during inspection, replace the fan.
Turn OFF the power for parts replacement. Check that the rotation of the fan is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or injury.
Step 1: Remove the screws that secure the fan. (Figure 10.1, 10.2 In some models, remove the fan
cover first.)
Step 2: Remove the fan connector. (Figure 10.3-10.4 The location of the connector differs according to
the model.)
Step 3: Change the fan to the maintenance fan and insert the fan connector.
Step 4: Attach the fan.
Note 1: Use the maintenance fan.
Note 2: Attach the fan so that the direction of the fan blast (FLOW) corresponds to the direction
of blast shown below.
Note 3: Remember to attach the finger guard or the fan cover.
Figure 10.1
Removing the fan (7.5K class)
Figure 10.2
Fan cover (55K class)
Direction of flow
- 132 -
Figure 10.3
Connector position (7.5K class)
Figure 10.4
Connector position (55K class)
Connector
Connector
Direction of flow
Direction of flow
z For details of how to replace a cooling fan for SHF-75K or SPF-90K or higher, separately contact Sanken
Electric Co., Ltd.
z Smoothing Capacitors
Aluminum electrolytic capacitors for smoothing deteriorate over time. Although the service life varies
greatly depending on the ambient temperature, load and length of use, they should be replaced
approximetely every 5th year or so when used under normal ambient conditions.
The inverter must receive transmitted electricity at least once a year when the inverter is stored and not
energized. The capacitors must be inspected at least once a year, and once in 6 months when they are
near the end of their lifetime.
(Inspection details)
1) Check that there is no liquid leaking.
2) Check that there is no loosening of safety valves.
3) Check that there is no deformation of or cracks in the cases.
4) Check that the measured result of electrical capacitance is not less than 85 % of rated capacity.
- 133 -
10.5 Electrical Measurement of Main Circuit
z Since the voltages and currents of the main inverter circuit at the input (power supply) and output (motor)
contain harmonic components, measured values may differ depending on the meter used. When using a
commercial frequency meter, select one of the types listed in the table below.
z The power factor cannot be measured with a commercial power-factor meter that measures the phase
difference between voltage and current. Measure the voltage, current, and power separately at the input
and output and calculate the power factor using the following formula:
Power factor [%] =
Power [kW]
√3 × Voltage [V] × Current [A]
× 100
Inverter
AR
Threephase
power
supply
WR
R
U
AU
VR
AS
S
V
AV
T
W
AW
VS
AT
Motor
VV
WR
VT
WU
VU
P
X
WW
VW
Table 10.3 Main circuit measuring instruments
Symbol
Measuring points
Power supply voltage
Measuring instruments
Moving-iron type AC voltmeter
Power supply current
Moving-iron type AC ammeter
Power supply power
Electrodynamic single-phase power meter or digital power
meter
Power supply power factor Digital power meter (Can be calculated with the measured
power supply voltage, current and power.)
Output voltage
Rectifier type AC voltmeter or digital power meter
Output current
Moving-iron type AC ammeter or digital power meter
Output power
Electrodynamic single-phase power meter or digital power
meter
Output power factor
Digital power meter (Can be calculated with the measured
output voltage, current and power.)
- 134 -
11. Specifications
11.1 Standard Specifications
200V system: SBT
Model
Output
Load (*1)
SBT-0.75K/1.5K SBT-1.5K/2.2K SBT-2.2K/3.7K
H
P
H
P
H
P
H
P
H
SBT-11K/15K
P
H
SBT-15K/18.5K SBT-18.5K/22K SBT-22K/30K
P
P
H
P
H
P
Rated capacity (*2)
1.9kVA 2.7kVA
3.0kVA
3.7kVA
4.3kVA
17.5kVA
21.7kVA 22.9kVA 25.9kVA
Rated current
5.1A 7.0A
8.0A
9.6A
11.2A 15.1A 17.6A 22.3A 24A
30A
Overload current (*3)
7.6A 8.4A 12.0A 11.5A 16.8A 18.1A 26.4A 26.7A 36A
36A
5.8kVA
6.7kVA
8.5kVA
Cooling method
Weight
69A
57A
60A
28.6kVA 31.2kVA 33.5kVA 41.9kVA
68A
75A
82A
88A
110A
68.4A 90A 81.6A 112.5A 98.4A 132A 132A
3-phase, 200 to 230 V at 50 or 60 Hz
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%)
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Forced air cooling
Natural cooling
4 kg
4 kg
4.5 kg
8 kg
8 kg
10 kg
12 kg
15 kg
18 kg
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 14 kHz) (*4)
0.05 to 600 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*5)
0.05 to 200 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*5)
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 600 Hz)
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*6)
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Start/stop setting
Digital setting
Analog setting
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
Function extension
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Ambient
temperature
49.5A 52.8A
46A
Analog setting
DC braking
Output
signals
44A
Digital setting
Additional functions
Frequency
command
setting
33A
V/f control or sensorless vector control
High-frequency carrier
Output
H characteristic
frequency
P characteristic
range
Frequency
Digital setting
setting
Analog setting
resolution
Frequency
accuracy
12.6kVA 16.8kVA
Voltage: ±10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
3 kg
Control method
9.1kVA 11.4kVA
200 V at 50 or 60 Hz, 220 V at 60 Hz
Protective structure
RS485, RS232C
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
H characteristic
-10 to +50°C (Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
P characteristic
-10 to +40°C (Remove the top ventilation cover of the SBT-3.7K/5.5K or a lower model at temperatures of +30°C or higher)
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*7)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 H characteristic (H): Constant torque load (for general industry)
P characteristic (P): Square-law decreasing torque load (for fan and pump)
*2 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 220 V
*3 One minute every 10 minutes
*4 The maximum carrier frequency varies with the rated characteristics and the operating status.
*5 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*6 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*7 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
*
H
1 5 k W 1 5 k W 18.5kW 18.5kW 2 2 k W 2 2 k W 3 0 k W
Power supply impedance
Control functions
SBT-7.5K/11K
11kW
Allowable fluctuation
Environment
P
0.75kW 1 . 5 k W 1 . 5 k W 2 . 2 k W 2 . 2 k W 3 . 7 k W 3 . 7 k W 5 . 5 k W 5 . 5 k W 7 . 5 k W 7 . 5 k W 1 1 k W
Rated voltage and frequency
Operational functions
H
Applicable motor capacity
Rated output voltage
Intput
SBT-3.7K/5.5K SBT-5.5K/7.5K
The SBT-7.5K/11K and lower models are equipped with discharge resistors as standard.
- 135 -
200V system: SBT
Model
SBT-30K
SBT-37K
Load (*1)
Output
Applicable motor capacity
37kW
45kW
55kW
Rated capacity (*2)
43.8kVA
55.2kVA
68.5kVA
83.8kVA
Rated current (*3)
115A
145A
180A
220A
Overload current (*4)
172A
217A
270A
330A
200 V 50/60 Hz 220 V 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
Allowable fluctuation
3-phase, 200 to 230 V at 50 or 60 Hz
Voltage: ±10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
Power supply impedance
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%)
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Control functions
38 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
High-frequency carrier
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 10 kHz) (*5)
Output frequency range
0.05 to 600 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*6)
Frequency
setting
resolution
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
Analog setting
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*7)
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Start/stop setting
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Analog setting
Additional functions
Frequency
command
setting
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 600 Hz)
Digital setting
DC braking
Operational functions
Forced air cooling
32 kg
Control method
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
Function extension
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Ambient temperature
Environment
SBT-55K
30kW
Rated output voltage
RS485, RS232C
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
-10 to +50°C (Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*8)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
SBT-45K
H characteristic
Indoors at altitude of 1,000 m or lower (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
H characteristic: Rated torque load (for general industry)
Rated capacity at output voltage of 220 V
Rated current should be reduced according to output power when input voltage is 200 VAC or higher.
1 min duration at 10-min intervals
The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operation status.
The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
- 136 -
400V system: SHF
Model
Output
SHF-1.5K
SHF-2.2K
SHF-4.0K
SHF-5.5K
SHF-7.5K
SHF-11K
SHF-15K
SHF-18.5K
SHF-22K
Applicable motor capacity
1.5kW
2.2kW
4.0kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
Rated capacity (*1)
2.8kVA
4.2kVA
6.2kVA
8.7kVA
11.8kVA
17.3kVA
22.2kVA
26.3kVA
31.9kVA
Rated current (*2)
4A
6A
9A
12.6A
17A
25A
32A
38A
46A
12 kg
15 kg
Overload current rating
150% 1 min
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
Allowable fluctuation
Power supply impedance
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%)
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
4 kg
4 kg
4.5 kg
Control functions
Control method
7 kg
10 kg
High-frequency carrier
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 14 kHz) (*3)
0.05 to 600 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*4)
Frequency
setting
resolution
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 600 Hz)
Analog setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Digital setting
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
DC braking
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Start/stop setting
Frequency
command
setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
6.5 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
Output frequency range
Additional functions
Operational functions
6.5 kg
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50°C (Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to outout power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
- 137 -
400V system: SHF
Model
SHF-30K
SHF-37K
SHF-45K
30kW
37kW
45kW
55kW
Rated capacity (*1)
42.3kVA
51.3kVA
62.4kVA
76.2kVA
Rated current (*2)
61A
74A
90A
110A
Output
Applicable motor capacity
Overload current rating
150% 1 min
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz (*7)
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max (*7)
Allowable fluctuation
Power supply impedance
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%)
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
20 kg
25 kg
Control functions
Control method
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 14 kHz) (*3)
Output frequency range
0.05 to 600 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*4)
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Digital setting
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Additional functions
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Operational functions
Start/stop setting
Frequency
command
setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
33 kg
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 600 Hz)
Analog setting
DC braking
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
32 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
High-frequency carrier
Frequency
setting
resolution
SHF-55K
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50°C (Remove the top ventilation cover at +40°C or higher)
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to outout power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
*7 For SHF-37K to SHF-55K, a tap (TAP1 or TAP2) must be switched according to variable input ranges. Refer to section 4.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams for
details.
- 138 -
Model
SHF-75K
SHF-90K
SHF-110K
SHF-132K
SHF-160K
SHF-200K
SHF-220K
SHF-250K
75kW
90kW
110kW
132kW
160kW
20 kW
220kW
250kW
Rated capacity (*1)
102kVA
120kVA
146kVA
180kVA
211kVA
267kVA
295kVA
327kVA
Rated current (*2)
147A
173A
211A
260A
304A
386A
426A
472A
280 kg
280 kg
Output
Applicable motor capacity
Overload current rating
150% 1 min
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
Power supply impedance
1% or more
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
70 kg
95 kg
105 kg
Control functions
Control method
275 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
Sine wave PWM (*3)
Output frequency range
0.05 to 200 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz)
Frequency
setting
resolution
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 200 Hz)
Analog setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Digital setting
0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Additional functions
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Start/stop setting
Frequency
command
setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
160 kg
High-frequency carrier
DC braking
Operational functions
150 kg
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage,
momentary power failure, fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50°C
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to output power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
- 139 -
400V system: SPF
Model
Output
SPF-2.2K
SPF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
SPF-7.5K
SPF-11K
SPF-15K
SPF-18.5K
SPF-22K
SPF-30K
Applicable motor capacity
2.2kW
4.0kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18.5kW
22kW
30kW
Rated capacity (*1)
3.8kVA
6.2kVA
8.7kVA
11.4kVA
16.6kVA
22.2kVA
26.3kVA
31.2kVA
40.9kVA
Rated current (*2)
5.5A
8.9A
12.6A
16.4A
24A
32A
38A
45A
59A
12 kg
15 kg
Overload current rating
120% 1 min
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
Allowable fluctuation
Power supply impedance
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%)
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
4 kg
4 kg
4.5 kg
Control functions
Control method
7 kg
10 kg
High-frequency carrier
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 14 kHz) (*3)
0.05 to 200 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*4)
Frequency
setting
resolution
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 200 Hz)
Analog setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Digital setting
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
DC braking
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Start/stop setting
Frequency
command
setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
6.5 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
Output frequency range
Additional functions
Operational functions
6.5 kg
Ambient temperature
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
-10 to +40°C (Remove the top ventilation cover of the SPF-5.5K or a lower model at temperatures of +30°C or higher)
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to outout power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
- 140 -
400V system: SPF
Model
SPF-37K
SPF-45K
SPF-55K
37kW
45kW
55kW
75kW
Rated capacity (*1)
51.3kVA
62.4kVA
76.2kVA
98.4kVA
Rated current (*2)
74A
90A
110A
142A
Output
Applicable motor capacity
Overload current rating
120% 1 min
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Intput
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz (*7)
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max (*7)
Allowable fluctuation
Power supply impedance
1% or more (Use the optional reactor if less than 1%) (*8)
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
20 kg
25 kg
Control functions
Control method
Sine wave PWM (carrier frequency: 1 to 14 kHz) (*3)
Output frequency range
0.05 to 200 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz variable) (*4)
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
Digital setting
±0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Additional functions
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Operational functions
Start/stop setting
Frequency
command
setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
33 kg
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 200 Hz)
Analog setting
DC braking
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
32 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
High-frequency carrier
Frequency
setting
resolution
SPF-75K
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage, momentary power failure,
fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
Ambient temperature
-10 to +40°C
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to outout power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
*7 For SPF-45K and SPF-75K, a tap (TAP1 or TAP2) must be switched according to variable input ranges. Refer to section 4.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams for
details.
*8 SPF-75K comes standard-equipped with a DC reactor.
- 141 -
Model
SPF-90K
SPF-110K
SPF-132K
SPF-160K
SPF-200K
SPF-220K
SPF-250K
SPF-280K
90kW
110 kW
132kW
160kW
200kW
220kW
250kW
280kW
315kW
Rated capacity (*1)
120kVA
146kVA
180kVA
211kVA
267kVA
295kVA
327kVA
374kVA
409kVA
Rated current (*2)
173A
211A
260A
304A
386A
426A
472A
540A
590A
280 kg
280 kg
Output
Applicable motor capacity
Overload current rating
120% 1 min
Intput
Rated output voltage
3-phase, 380 V at 50 Hz, 400 V at 50 Hz, 460 V at 60 Hz
Rated voltage and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V at 50 or 60 Hz
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: -15%, +10% Frequency: ±5% Voltage imbalance: 3% max
Power supply impedance
1% or more
Protective structure
Totally enclosed (IP20)
Cooling method
Weight
Forced air cooling
70 kg
95 kg
105 kg
Control functions
Control method
160 kg
Sine wave PWM (*3)
0.05 to 200 Hz (starting frequency: 0.05 to 20 Hz)
275 kg
Frequency
setting
resolution
Digital setting
Frequency
accuracy
Digital setting
0.01% of the output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Analog setting
±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C) (*5)
0.01 Hz (0.05 to 200 Hz)
Analog setting
10 bits for 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA, 9 bits for 0 to 5 V for maximum output frequency
DC braking
Starting frequency (0.2 to 20 Hz), operation time (0.1 to 10 s), braking force (1 to 10 steps)
Restart after momentary power failure, flying start, multi-speed operation, frequency jump, auto alarm recovery,
PID control operation, simple scheduled operation, energy-saving operation, torque limiter (for sensorless vector control only)
Start/stop setting
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), step setting from terminal board
Analog setting
2 channels, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, variable resistor (5 kΩ, 0.3 W or more)
Frequency command, forward run command, reverse run command, acceleration/deceleration time setting, free-run stop/alarm reset,
emergency stop, jogging selection, step frequency setting, operation signal hold, torque limiter (sensorless vector control only)
[Digital input; 8 channels (arbitrary allocation)] [Analog input; 1 channel for voltage, 1 channel for current and voltage]
Input signals
Output
signals
Operation panel, serial communication (RS485, RS232C), control circuit terminals
Digital setting
Contact output
Alarm batch and multifunctional contact output (1C contact, 250 VAC, 0.3 A)
Monitor signal
Operating, frequency matching, overload alarm, undervoltage, frequency approach
[Open-collector output: 3 channels (arbitrary allocation), Analog output: 2 channels]
LED display
Frequency, output current, synchronous rotation, load factor, output voltage, pressure, line speed (no units), operating, alarm
Serial communication I/F
RS485, RS232C
Function extension
Software upgrade by RS232C serial communication supported
External power supply output
Protection functions
Warning functions
Environment
160 kg
High-frequency carrier
Additional functions
Operational functions
150 kg
V/f control or sensorless vector control
Output frequency range
Frequency
command
setting
SPF-315K
24 VDC, 150 mA (control terminal)
Current limiting, overcurrent shutoff, motor overload, external thermal alarm, undervoltage, overvoltage,
momentary power failure, fin overheat, missing phase
Overvoltage prevention, current limiting during acceleration/deceleration, brake resistor overheat, overload, overheating of radiator fins
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50°C
Storage temperature
-20 to +65°C (*6)
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
90%RH or less (with no condensation)
Indoor at 1,000 m or lower altitude (No direct sunlight, corrosive or inflammable gases, oil mist, or dust)
*1 Rated capacity at the output voltage of 400 V
*2 Rated current should be reduced according to output power when input voltage is 400 VAC or higher.
*3 The maximum carrier frequency varies depending on the capacity of the inverter and the operating status.
*4 The frequency setting range for sensorless vector control is 1 to 130 Hz for a four-pole motor (depends on the number of poles).
*5 The maximum output frequency is at 5 V, 10 V, and 20 mA.
*6 This temperature is for short periods, such as during transportation.
- 142 -
11.2 Communication Specifications
Physical-layer
electrical characteristics
RS485 communication
RS232C communication
Network configuration
Two-wire bus configuration
(multi-drop link)
1-to-1 configuration with three wires
Transmission distance
500 m total
(with terminating resistor)
About 5 m max
Number of units
connected
32 max
1
Connection cable
Shielded twisted-pair cable recommended
Shielded cable recommended
Communication
power supply
Communication speed
[bps]
Modulation
Communication type
Synchronization
Communication control
Insulated from the inverter
19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, and 1200 selectable
Baseband
Half-duplex communication
Asynchronous
Polling or selecting (partial contention)
Data format
Character code data or binary data
Data length
8 bits
Character code
ASCII
Stop bit
Error checking method
Message end code
1 or 2 bits selectable
Parity bit and 1-byte checksum data (The parity bit is Even, Odd, or None.)
CR+LF or CR+CR (No codes are attached to a binary-format message.)
- 143 -
12. External Dimensions
(1) SBT-0.75K/1.5K - SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SHF-1.5K - SHF-4.0K
SPF-2.2K - SPF-5.5K
250
238
2- φ 5
5
128
D
140
Model
D
SBT-0.75K/1.5K
145
SBT-1.5K/2.2K
SBT-2.2K/3.7K
SBT-3.7K/5.5K
SHF-1.5K
SHF-2.2K
SHF-4.0K
SPF-4.0K
SPF-5.5K
170
(Unit: mm)
- 144 -
(2) SBT-5.5K/7.5K - SBT-15K/18.5K
SHF-5.5K - SHF-15K
SPF-7.5K - SPF-18.5K
2-φ6
Ctrl
MPa
H
V
STOP
%
rpm
A
Hz
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
•
ENTER
PROG
CLEAR
0
H1
DRIVE
d
W1
W
D
Model
H
H1
W
W1
D
d
SBT-5.5K/7.5K
SBT-7.5K/11K
300
280
200
180
205
6
360
340
240
220
205
6
SBT-11K/15K
SBT-15K/18.5K
SHF-5.5K
SHF-7.5K
SHF-11K
SHF-15K
300
280
200
180
205
6
360
340
240
220
205
6
SPF-7.5K
SPF-11K
300
280
200
180
205
6
SPF-15K
SPF-18.5K
360
340
240
220
205
6
- 145 -
(Unit: mm)
(3) SBT-18.5K/22K - SBT-22K/30K, SBT-30K - SBT-55K
SHF-18.5K - SHF-55K
SPF-22K - SPF-75K
2-φd
Ctrl
MPa
H
V
%
rpm
STOP
PROG
CLEAR
A
Hz
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
•
ENTER
H1
DRIVE
d
W1
D
W
Model
SBT-18.5K/22K
SBT-22K/30K
SBT-30K
SBT-37K
SBT-45K
SBT-55K
SHF-18.5K
SHF-22K
SHF-30K
SHF-37K
SHF-45K
SHF-55K
SPF-22K
SPF-30K
SPF-37K
SPF-45K
SPF-55K
SPF-75K
H
H1
W
W1
D
215
240
d
390
370
270
248
550
530
375
353
245
7
650
630
375
353
300
7
390
370
270
248
215
240
7
440
420
340
318
240
7
550
530
340
318
260
7
390
370
270
248
440
420
340
318
240
7
550
530
340
318
260
7
- 146 -
215
240
7
7
(Unit: mm)
(4) SHF-75K - SHF-250K
SPF-90K - SPF-315K
φ20
H1
H
2-φd
d
W1
W
D
Model
SHF-75K
H
750
H1
725
W
440
W1
360
D
295
d
12
SHF-90K
SHF-110K
850
910
825
885
520
520
400
400
360
360
12
12
SHF-132K
SHF-160K
SHF-200K
SHF-220K
SHF-250K
SPF-90K
SPF-110K
SPF-132K
SPF-160K
SPF-200K
SPF-220K
SPF-250K
SPF-280K
SPF-315K
990
990
1100
950
950
1050
692
692
794
600
600
600
380
380
465
15
15
18
1150
1100
794
600
465
18
750
850
910
990
725
825
885
950
440
520
520
692
360
400
400
600
295
360
360
380
12
12
12
15
990
950
692
600
380
15
1100
1050
794
600
465
18
1150
1100
794
600
465
18
- 147 -
(Unit: mm)
(5) Operation panel
94
+0
-0.8
2-M3 anchoring screw
V
9
4
5
6
PROG
1
2
3
CLEAR
DISP
0
%
rpm
A
Hz
DRIVE
STOP
ENTER
1.5
104
23.6
+0
-0.8
32.5
+0.5
101 -0
- 148 -
1.5
63
+0.5
-0
Attaching location of operation panel
+0
-0.5
MPa
8
67
Ctrl
7
54
+0
-0.5
6.5
15.4
13. Options
z The following optional board built into the inverter is available.
Type
Name
SB-PG
PG feedback board
Function
Applicable inverter
Detect the motor speed with the detector (PG) to operate
speed control function and position control function.
· Keep the motor speed constant when the load changes.
· Can stop the machine tool at fixed position.
SAMCO-vm05
All models
Feed pump system board
SWS
The constant feed pump system that can attach up to 7
pumps can be constructed without PDI controller or PLC
controller.
The inverter driving fixed system and circuit system,
automatic control function of auxiliary pump, regular
switching function and other control functions are available.
In addition, this can be used as a multifunctional relay output
function.
SAMCO-vm05
All SBT models
SHF-55K or lower
SPF-75K or lower
Current output board
SAS
The output frequency of the inverter can be output by 4 to 20
mA current value.
SAMCO-vm05
All models
Digital input board
SDI
The frequency setting of the inverter can be performed very
accurately with the external 4 digits BCD or 16 bit binary
digital signal input.
SAMCO-vm05
All models
PC transfer program
for upgrade
FMTP
This application software upgrades the control program of
the inverter using an external PC.
SAMCO-vm05
All models
(Not for sale)
For details, ask the
distributor.
z The inverter can mount 2 optional boards simultaneously. (Install first optional board to slot 1 on the basic
inverter. Install second optional board to slot 2 on the first optional board mounted on slot 1.)
The 2 optional boards can be installed simultaneously provided that a combination of optional boards is
available. The combination list is as follows.
Slot 1
Slot 2
Not mounted
SB-PG
SWS
SAS
Not mounted
SB-PG
SWS
SAS
SDI
: Available
: Not available
- 149 -
SDI
SANKEN ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
1-11-1 Nishi-Ikebukuro, Toshima-ku, Tokyo
Phone : 03-3986-6701 Fax : 03-3986-2650
Published April 2007. Corresponding software version:
• SHF-55K, SPF-75K and lower: Ver - 3.10 or later
• SHF-75K, SPF-90K and higher: Ver - 5.00 or later
TEX48194-253F

Open as PDF

Similar pages: ETC 3G3MV; ETC 3G3JV; ETC VFD-L; FUJI EDS11-130; AKM AK7744VT; FUJI EDSX11-140A; PCD4541 User`s Manual; 1333 (SERIES B & C) TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE; 1332 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE; Inverter Control by V850 Series Vector Control by Encoder AN; SynQor UPS Terminal Commands Command Summary; omron.com; Terminal Functions; COA - Power Mate Technology Co., LTD; FUJITSU FBR166SCD012-WB